InfoPrint 4100 Models with the InfoPrint Controller ...info.rpp.ricoh-usa.com/help/topic/com.ibm.printers.continuous/G550... · 5/31/2012 · Valid Form Lengths in Inches ... Models

InfoPrint 4100 Models with theInfoPrint Controller Operator Console

Planning and Configuration Guide

G550-0990-06

InfoPrint 4100 Models with theInfoPrint Controller Operator Console

Planning and Configuration Guide

G550-0990-06

Note:Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in “Notices” on page 237.

Sixth edition (June 2012)

This edition applies to InfoPrint® 4100 printers with controller code at version 15.6 or later.

This edition replaces G550-0990-05.

InternetVisit our home page: http://www.infoprint.com

You can send comments by e-mail to [email protected] or by mail to:

Ricoh Company, Ltd.6300 Diagonal Hwy 002JBoulder, CO 80301-9270U.S.A.

This product is or contains commercial computer software and commercial computer software documentationdeveloped exclusively at private expense. As specified in Federal Acquisition Regulation 12.212 in the case of civilianagencies and Defense Federal Acquisition Regulation Supplement 227.7202 in the case of military agencies, use,duplication and disclosure by agencies of the U.S. Government shall solely be in accordance with the accompanyingInternational Program License Agreement in case of software products and in accordance with the licensing termsspecified in the product's documentation in the case of hardware products.

Contents

Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viiAbout this Publication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viiTerms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viiiInfoPrint 4100 Models MS1, HS2, HS3, MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6, TS1, TS2, TS3, TD1/2, TD3/4, and

TD5/6 Advanced Function Printers Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viiiRelated Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii

Chapter 1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Printer Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1System Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

InfoPrint 4100 Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Simplex Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Printing Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Configuration for a Simplex Printing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Duplex Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Duplex System Printing Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Inline Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6, TD1/2, and TD3/4 with WebCooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Left-Angle Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6, TD1/2, TD3/4, and TD5/6with Web Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

‘H’ Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6, TD1/2, and TD3/4 with Web CoolingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Left-Angle Configuration for Dual Simplex Printing without Web Cooling System . . . . . . . . . 14Inline Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2 or TD1/2 without Web Cooling System. . . . . 15Inline Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models HD3/4 or TD3/4 without Web Cooling System . . . . . 16Inline Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models HD5/6 without Web Cooling System . . . . . . . . 17Left-Angle Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6, TD1/2, and TD3/4 without

Web Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18‘H’ Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6, TD1/2, and TD3/4 without Web

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Basic Page-Printing Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Combining Text with Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Orienting Text and Images on a Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Advanced Function Image and Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Multiple-up Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Using Stored Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

TrueType/OpenType Fonts and Unicode print data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Enhanced Toner Loading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Magnetic Ink Character Recognition (MICR) CCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Magnetic ink character recognition (MICR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Customer Changeable Developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Additional Customer Changeable Developers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Developer Cart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Chapter 2. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Printing Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Print Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Print Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Intelligent Halftone Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Print Quality Enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40AFP Color Emulation Feature (FC 4850 or 4851) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

iii

Simulating Color with Gray Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Printer Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

480/600 Switchable Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42IPDS Resolution (600 dpi Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Font Smoothing Mode (480 and 600 dpi Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44AFP Resource Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Forms Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Splicing Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Print Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Touch panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Power Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Duplex Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Simplex Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Software Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47IPDS Print on Demand (POD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47IPDS Production Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Application Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Host System Adapter Choices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Gigabit Ethernet Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49System/390 Fiber Connection (FICON) Channel Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Enterprise Systems Connection (ESCON) Channel Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Preprocessing and Postprocessing Device Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Universal printer pre- and postprocessing interface (UP3I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Reliability, Availability, and Serviceability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Data Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Resident Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Chapter 3. Organizing the Planning Team . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Planning Coordinator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Physical Planner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58System and Application Programmers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Implementation Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Fifteen Weeks Before Delivery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Ten Weeks Before Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Eight Weeks Before Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Six Weeks Before Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Four Weeks Before Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Arrival of the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Chapter 4. Preparing the Processing Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Network Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Gigabit Ethernet SX (fiber) TCP/IP Local Area Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Gigabit Ethernet TX (copper) TCP/IP Local Area Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62FICON Channel Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63ESCON Channel Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Multiple Host Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Adapter cable features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Selecting a cable feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Performance Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71SNMP Remote Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Advanced Function Presentation Licensed Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

InfoPrint Advanced Function Presentation Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Optical Character Recognition and Bar Code Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Installing and Verifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

iv Planning and Configuration Guide

Chapter 5. Preparing the Physical Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Normal Precautions to Prevent Fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Vacuum Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Physical Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Environmental Impact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Heat Dissipation, Power, and Acoustics (Models MS1, MD1/2, TS1, and TD1/2) . . . . . . . . 84Heat Dissipation, Power, and Acoustics (Models HS2 and HD3/4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Heat Dissipation, Power, and Acoustics (Models HS3 and HD5/6). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Heat Dissipation, Power, and Acoustics (Models TS2 and TD3/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Heat Dissipation, Power, and Acoustics (Models TS3 and TD5/6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Space Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Duplex Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Simplex Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Physical Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Shipping Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Physical Attachment Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Chapter 6. Selecting and Testing Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Continuous Forms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Special-Purpose Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Preprinted Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Storing Print Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Testing Forms and Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Valid Form Lengths in Inches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Chapter 7. Setting Printer Definition Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Changing the Language of Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Changing Access Levels and Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Managing and Defining New Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Defining the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Configuring the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Printer Definition Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Defining Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Configuring Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Defining Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Configuring Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Defining Remote Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Configuring Remote Access for SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Configuring Remote Access for Online Access (Web Pages) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Configuring Remote Access for E-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Configuring Remote Access for PRSCD (Printer Reported Service and Configuration Data) . . . . 145Configuring Remote Access to Host using Telnet 3270 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Configuring Remote Access to Host using Telnet 5250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Configuring Remote Access to InfoPrint Process Director (IPPD) on the Host . . . . . . . . . 146

Troubleshooting LAN Connectivity and LAN Communication Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Defining Interfaces and Preprocessing or Postprocessing Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Options for Simplex and Duplex Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Chapter 8. Establishing Form Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Chapter 9. Creating and Copying Snapshots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157Creating and saving Snapshots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Contents v

Editing multiple Snapshots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Saving Print Quality Settings to a Snapshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Understanding Print Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Copying Snapshots between InfoPrint Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Copying Snapshots from the AFCCU to the InfoPrint Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Appendix A. Obtaining Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Supplies Work Sheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

InfoPrint 4100 Models MS1, MD1/2, TS1, and TD1/2 Supplies Work Sheet . . . . . . . . . . 167InfoPrint 4100 Models HS2 and HD3/4 Supplies Work Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168InfoPrint 4100 Models TS2 and TD3/4 Supplies Work Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169InfoPrint 4100 Models HS3 and HD5/6 Supplies Work Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170InfoPrint 4100 Models TS3 and TD5/6 Supplies Work Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Ordering Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Maintenance Supply Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Customer-replaceable Supply Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Warranty Returns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Storing Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Appendix B. Work Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Installation Planning Work Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Physical Planning Work Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Duplex Definition Work Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Simplex Definition Work Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Snapshots Work Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Appendix C. Standard Power Plug Listings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Communication statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

vi Planning and Configuration Guide

Preface

This publication introduces and summarizes the functions of the InfoPrint 4100 Models MS1, HS2, HS3,MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6, TS1, TS2, TS3, TD1/2, TD3/4, and TD5/6 with the InfoPrint Controller OperatorConsole and its configurations. This publication also contains information to help you prepare for installingand using the printer.

The first part of this publication is written for executives who are thinking about buying InfoPrint 4100Models with the InfoPrint Controller Operator Console. The second part is for the planning team that isresponsible for installing the printer and preparing it for regular operation. The last part of this publicationconcerns printer definition (sometimes referred to as printer configuration). It is used for determining howthe InfoPrint 4100 Models with the InfoPrint Controller Operator Console are to be configured duringinstallation and for changing printer definition items as necessary after the printing system is installed andoperating.

The models supported by this publication are:

v InfoPrint 4100 Models MS1

v InfoPrint 4100 Models HS2

v InfoPrint 4100 Models HS3

v InfoPrint 4100 Models TS1



v InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1 and MD2

v InfoPrint 4100 Models HD3 and HD4

v InfoPrint 4100 Models HD5 and HD6

v InfoPrint 4100 Models TD1 and TD2



About this PublicationThis publication contains the following chapters:

Chapter 1, “Introduction,” on page 1 gives an overview of the printer characteristics and basicconcepts.

Chapter 2, “Specifications,” on page 35 describes the printer functions and features in detail.

Chapter 3, “Organizing the Planning Team,” on page 57 describes the installation planning team andspecifies the tasks for which each team member is responsible.

Chapter 4, “Preparing the Processing Environment,” on page 61 describes requirements associatedwith channel attachment, pattern storage, and Advanced Function Presentation licensed programs.

Chapter 5, “Preparing the Physical Environment,” on page 77 specifies the printer environmental,electrical, and space requirements.

Chapter 6, “Selecting and Testing Forms,” on page 105 describes the basic requirements for formsused in the printers and describes methods for evaluating them.

Chapter 7, “Setting Printer Definition Values,” on page 109 describes the definition options that aredefined at installation time and changed later as needs require.

Chapter 9, “Creating and Copying Snapshots,” on page 157 describes Snapshots and lists theconfiguration items that can be saved in a Snapshot, focusing specifically on form settings.

Appendix A, “Obtaining Supplies,” on page 165 lists supplies used in the printers and describes how toorder them.

vii

Appendix B, “Work Sheets,” on page 173 provides work sheets on which you can record yourinstallation and definition choices.

Appendix C, “Standard Power Plug Listings,” on page 233 provides specifications for standard powerplugs by country for the InfoPrint 4100 Models MS1, HS2, HS3, MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6, TS1, TS2, TS3,TD1/2, TD3/4, and TD5/6 printer control unit, the MD1, HD3, HD5, TD1, TD3, and TD5 printer utilitymodule, and the Air Bearing Buffer Flipper Unit.

TermsIn InfoPrint 4100 Models MS1, HS2, HS3, MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6, TS1, TS2, TS3, TD1/2, TD3/4, andTD5/6 Advanced Function Printers publications, the terms forms and paper have specific meanings.Forms refers to the media on which the printer can print. Forms can be blank paper, preprinted paper,adhesive labels, cards, or any other printable material. Paper refers to a specific fiber-based material usedto make forms.

Duplex printing systems operating in duplex mode, such as the InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2, HD3/4,HD5/6, TD1/2, TD3/4, and TD5/6, have two printers commonly referred to in this publication as Printer 1and Printer 2. Printer 1 is the first printer to print on the forms as they enter. Printer 1 does not have atouchscreen. Printer 2 prints on the other side of the forms, which have been turned over by theBuffer/Flipper Unit. Printer 2 has a touchscreen, as well as a keyboard and mouse.

For definitions of other terms, see the “Glossary” on page 243. These comprehensive reference toolscontain not only terms used in this publication, but also terms, abbreviations, and acronyms from otherpublications in the InfoPrint 4100 Advanced Function Printers Library.

InfoPrint 4100 Models MS1, HS2, HS3, MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6, TS1, TS2,TS3, TD1/2, TD3/4, and TD5/6 Advanced Function Printers LibraryThe following additional InfoPrint Advanced Function Printers publications are available:

v IPDS Handbook for Printers that Use the Advanced Function Common Control Unit and the InfoPrintController, which contains technical information about the host-to-printer data stream, and exceptionreporting.

v InfoPrint 4100 Models with the InfoPrint Controller Operator Console: Operator's Guide, which describesthe procedures required to operate the InfoPrint 4100 Models with the InfoPrint Controller OperatorConsole.

v InfoPrint 4100 Models with the InfoPrint Controller Operator Console: Quick Reference Guide, whichdescribes the tasks an operator may need to run when the online help is not available.

Related PublicationsAn extensive listing of available publications is included in Advanced Function Presentation: PrinterInformation

The following publications are referred to in this document:v About Type: InfoPrint Solutions Company's Technical Reference for 240-pel Digitized Typev Bar Code Fonts User's Guidev Bar Code Object Content Architecture Referencev Cabling System Optical Fiber Planning and Installation Guidev Cabling System Technical Interfacev Forms Design Reference for Continuous Forms Advanced Function Printersv General Information Manual: Installation Manual–Physical Planningv Guide to Advanced Function Presentationv InfoPrint Solutions Company Product Descriptionv Intelligent Printer Data Stream Reference

viii Planning and Configuration Guide

v Fiber Optic Link Planning

Contact your marketing representative for information concerning the InfoPrint 4100 Advanced FunctionPrinters, their manuals, or associated licensed programs.

Preface ix

x Planning and Configuration Guide

Chapter 1. Introduction

Chapter OverviewThis chapter introduces you to the InfoPrint 4100 with the InfoPrint Controller Operator Console. Forreaders not familiar with nonimpact, all-points-addressable printers, this chapter also defines somebasic page-printing concepts.

Printer CharacteristicsThe InfoPrint 4100 family of printers are nonimpact, all-points-addressable printers. These printers use alaser, electrophotographic print technology, and Advanced Function Presentation™ (AFP) licensedprograms to create high-quality text and graphics printer output.

Nonimpact printing, combined with all-points addressability, allows graphics and many different type sizesand styles to appear on a single page. Text, images, and electronic overlays can be placed at any definedpoint on the page areas on which the printer can print. The printers can be used for text, image, graphics,optical character recognition (OCR), and bar-code printing. See “System Characteristics” on page 2 for theprint resolution (pel) of each model.

Using a duplex printing system, the output of the printers can have print on both sides of a form. Thesystem consists of two printer engines in series, each printing on one side of the form with the formsinverted between them. You can use one or both of the printer engines in the system for simplex printingapplications.

The printers use continuous-forms in a variety of sizes, styles, and weights, including preprinted forms(see “System Characteristics” on page 2 for more information). The printers use an automatic assist forloading most forms. After printing, the forms may be processed by an optional postprocessing device.

InfoPrint 4100 models can have up to four pre/postprocessing device interfaces per engine. Up to fourpreprocessing and postprocessing device interfaces can be installed on Printer 1. Printer 2 can have fourinterfaces installed.

v Two pre/postprocessing device interfaces are standard, one in each system printer. Three additionalpre/postprocessing device interfaces can be installed as optional features on Printer 1 or Printer 2.

v See “Defining Interfaces and Preprocessing or Postprocessing Devices” on page 149 for moreinformation.

Performance enhancements, such as the Advanced Function Image and Graphics (AFIG) feature, areintegral to the controller software design. Additionally, the controller software extends the scalingperformance enhancement for compressed images to all scaling factors, enabling the printing ofcompressed images at significantly higher levels of performance.

The printer can be used in z/OS, OS/400, InfoPrint Manager for AIX, InfoPrint Manager for Windows, andInfoPrint Process Director for Windows, and can be Ethernet-attached to many different processors. Foradditional information, see “Host System Adapter Choices” on page 48.

1

|||

System Characteristics

InfoPrint 4100 ModelsFor InfoPrint models HS2 & HD3/4, HS3 & HD5/6, MS1 & MD1/2, TS1 & TD1/2, TS2 & TD3/4, TS3 &TD5/6 contact your sales representative for paper specifications based on the printer configuration.

2 Planning and Configuration Guide

Simplex PrintersSimplex printing refers to printing on one side of a form. Duplex printing refers to printing on both sides ofa form.

ComponentsSimplex printing systems include the following:

v Printer engine

v Control Unit. This unit includes:

– Operator Alert assembly

– Power Control panel

– A printer controller processor

– Touch panel

– System interconnection electronics and cables

– Preprocessing/postprocessing device interfaces

Printing MethodsThe continuous forms can be threaded various ways:

v From the forms input area of the printer to a postprocessing device

v From a preprocessing device through the printer to a postprocessing device.

v From a preprocessor to internal stacker

Up to four preprocessing/postprocessing devices may be connected to the printer. For more information onpreprocessing/postprocessing devices see “Preprocessing and Postprocessing Device Interfaces” on page50.

The printer attaches to a host system through the control unit, which controls the printer.

See allowable configuration in “Configuration for a Simplex Printing System” on page 4.

Chapter 1. Introduction 3

Configuration for a Simplex Printing System

(1) Optional preprocessing device(2) Control unit(3) InfoPrint 4100 print engine(4) Postprocessing device

g5au

d087

4

32

1


Duplex Systems

Duplex System Printing MethodsSimplex printing refers to printing on one side of a form. Duplex printing refers to printing on both sides ofa form.

You can operate these printers as follows:

v Duplex: Uses both printers (Printer 1 prints on one side of the form and Printer 2 prints on the otherside of the form). Duplex printing can create same-side duplex prints – applications include MICR andhighlight color.

v Dual Simplex: Uses both printers separately in simplex mode; each printer is independent of the otherand can print different jobs at the same time.

Duplex PrintingDuplex printing is achieved by arranging both printers in series, separated by additional equipment, in aconfiguration that takes the continuous forms exiting from the first printer through one or more units thatturn the forms over (inverts them) before threading them through the second printer. The first printer in thepaper path prints one side of a form; the second printer in the paper path prints the other side of the form.See “Physical Dimensions” on page 102 for approximate dimensions of the printers, control units, anddifferent Cooling Tower/Buffer/Flipper Units. See “Air Bearing Flipper and Tall Buffer/Flipper Unit” on page9 for optional and required Buffer/Flipper Units for each configuration.

The following are suggested printer system configurations for duplex printing:

v Inline configuration (see “Inline Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6, TD1/2,and TD3/4 with Web Cooling System” on page 11 “Inline Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2or TD1/2 without Web Cooling System” on page 15 “Inline Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 ModelsHD3/4 or TD3/4 without Web Cooling System” on page 16 and “Inline Configuration for InfoPrint 4100Models HD5/6 without Web Cooling System” on page 17)

v Left angle configuration (90° angle) (see “Left-Angle Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2,HD3/4, HD5/6, TD1/2, TD3/4, and TD5/6 with Web Cooling System” on page 12“Left-AngleConfiguration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6, TD1/2, and TD3/4 without Web CoolingSystem” on page 18)

v ‘H’ configuration (see “‘H’ Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6, TD1/2, andTD3/4 with Web Cooling System” on page 13“‘H’ Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2, HD3/4,HD5/6, TD1/2, and TD3/4 without Web Cooling System” on page 19)

Alternative configurations should be discussed with your marketing representative.

The forms path can be:

v From the forms input area of Printer 1 through to the forms exit area.

v From the forms input area of Printer 1 through to a postprocessing device at the output of Printer 2

v From a preprocessing device ahead of Printer 1 through to a postprocessing device at the output ofPrinter 2

When running duplex printing applications, both printers in the configuration are operating at the sameimpressions per minute (ipm) speed. The total speed or ipm of the subsystem is then twice the ipm of anindividual printer, counting both the front and back sides of the forms.

Both printers in the configuration attach to a host system through the control unit, which controls bothprinters simultaneously and is physically attached to Printer 2 in the configuration.


Dual Simplex PrintingAn example of a left-angle dual simplex configuration is shown in “Left-Angle Configuration for DualSimplex Printing without Web Cooling System” on page 14 supports printing as follows:

v Dual Simplex: Both printers in the configuration can run independent simplex applications.

The forms path in each printer can be:

– From the forms input area of the printer to the forms exit area of the printer or to a postprocessingdevice at the output of the printer

– From a preprocessing device ahead of the printer to a postprocessing device at the output of theprinter.

– From the forms input area of the printer to the output stacker of the printer

Each printer can have its own set of preprocessing and postprocessing devices.

Both printers in the configuration attach to a host system through the control unit attached to Printer 2.Each printer is controlled independently.

When the printing system is configured as dual simplex and one of the printers is inoperable, theremaining printer can run independently so long as power and connection to the control unit aremaintained.

ComponentsThe major components of the InfoPrint 4100 Advanced Function Duplex Printing System are a pair ofprinters, hereafter referred to as a Duplex Printing System.

A Duplex Printing System can be used for simplex and duplex printing applications.

In this publication the first printer is called Printer 1, and the second printer is called Printer 2.

Printer 1This printer includes:

v Printer engine

v Control Unit. This unit includes:



– System interconnection electronics


Printer 2This printer includes:

v Printer engine

v Control Unit – This unit includes:



– A printer controller

– Touch panel

– System interconnection electronics and cables



Complete duplex printing systemA Web Cooling System can be included with InfoPrint models MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6, TD1/2, TD3/4, andTD5/6 in Inline, 'H' and Left-Angle Configurations. Other duplex models include a Buffer/Flipper Unit. Eachprinter engine also includes an integrated urge unit.

Web Cooling System:

Note: The web cooling system must be installed by your Customer Support Specialist.

The web cooling system for the inline configuration consists of a Cooling Tower (1) a Vacuum Unit (2), andmust be used with an attached Air Bearing Flipper (3).

The vacuum unit provides adjustable tension on the forms to control the web. The cooling tower cools theweb before it enters the Air Bearing Flipper.

1

23

g5au

d235

Figure 1. Air bearing flipper, cooling tower, and vacuum unit


The web cooling system for the ‘L’ configuration consists of a Cooling Tower (1) a Vacuum Unit (2), an AirSupply Unit (3) and a Air Bearing Turnbar with 90° turn (4). The web cooling system for the ‘H’configuration consists of the same devices, with the addition of two walkovers and an additional AirBearing Turnbar with 90° turn.

The vacuum unit provides adjustable tension on the forms to control the web. The cooling tower cools theweb before it enters the Air Bearing Turnbar. The air supply unit provides air for the cooling tower and airbearing turnbar(s).

g5aud252

1

23

4

Figure 2. Air bearing turnbar with 90 turn, air supply unit, air supply unit, cooling tower, and vacuum unit


Air Bearing Flipper and Tall Buffer/Flipper Unit:

The Air Bearing Flipper Unit and the Tall Buffer/Flipper Unit guide the paper path from the first printer tothe second printer in a dual-printer configuration without the web cooling system. They may or may notinvert the paper, depending on configuration, and provide additional paper cooling.

The following figure shows both the Tall Buffer/Flipper Unit (1) , and the Air Bearing Flipper Unit (2).

Paper Paths and Feature Codes:

Different devices allow forms to take the following paths from the first printer to the second printer:

v Straight through path (inline) with 180° inversion (see Figure 4 on page 11, Figure 8 on page 15,Figure 9 on page 16, and Figure 10 on page 17)

v ‘L’ configuration with 180° inversion (see Figure 5 on page 12, Figure 11 on page 18)

v ‘H’ configuration with 540° inversion (see Figure 6 on page 13, Figure 12 on page 19)

The air bearing turn unit or tall buffer/flipper unit turns the forms over (flips) so the other side of the formscan be printed by the second printer. In the case of ‘L’ and ‘H’ configurations, turnbars are used to flip thepaper at each 90° turn in the paper path. Because of the high speed with which forms travel throughPrinter 1, a “tall” Buffer/Flipper Unit is used to aid in cooling the paper before it enters Printer 2 in eitherthe inline or left/right path configuration without the web cooling system. The inline configuration uses anAir Bearing/Flipper Unit.

Table 1 on page 10 shows configurations, machine types, models and feature codes available, includingthe different buffer/flipper components that are provided for supported configurations in a duplex system.

g5aud253

1

2

Figure 3. Air bearing flipper unit, tall buffer/flipper unit


Table 1. Configurations, Machine types, Models and Feature Codes

Duplex Configuration Machine Type and ModelBuffer/Flipper Units and/or Web CoolingSystem

Inline configuration InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2 or TD1/2 Tall Buffer/Flipper (Feature Code 9407 or4407)With Web Cooling System (Feature Code9231 or 4231)

Inline configuration InfoPrint 4100 Models HD3/4 or TD3/4 Air Bearing Flipper Unit (Feature Code 9408or 4408)With Web Cooling System (Feature Code9231 or 4231)

Inline configuration InfoPrint 4100 Models HD5/6 or TD5/6 Tall Buffer/Flipper (Feature Code 9407 or4407) andAir Bearing Flipper Unit (Feature Code 9408or 4408)With Web Cooling System (Feature Code9231 or 4231)

Left angle configuration InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6,TD1/2, TD3/4, and TD5/6

Tall Buffer/Flipper (Feature Code 9407 or4407)With Web Cooling System (Feature Code9230 or 4230)

H configuration InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6,TD1/2, TD3/4, and TD5/6

Tall Buffer/Flipper (Feature Code 9407 or4407)With Web Cooling System (Feature Code9232 or 4232)

Note: Buffer/Flipper Units or the Web Cooling System are ordered with the MD1, HD3, HD5, TD1, TD3, and TD5Model printers.

Note: For 'H' Configurations only. A web drive source (or urge unit) may be required between printer Models MD1/2,HD3/4, HD5/6, TD1/2, TD3/4, and TD5/6 Web Cooling System, depending on the distance between engines.

Preprocessing/Postprocessing InterfacesPreprocessing/post processing device interfaces allow output capabilities and additional input capabilitiesbeyond the standard forms input source in the system printers.

Two preprocessing/postprocessing device interfaces (one in each printer) are provided. Additionalinterfaces can be purchased.


Inline Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6,TD1/2, and TD3/4 with Web Cooling System

(1) Optional preprocessing device attached to Printer 1(2) Control Unit attached to Printer 1(3) Printer 1 print engine(4) Vacuum Unit*(5) Cooling Tower*(6) Air Bearing Flipper*(7) Control Unit attached to Printer 2(8) Printer 2 print engine(9) Optional postprocessing device attached to Printer 2

* These components are supplied with Feature Code 9231 or 4231.

See “Space Requirements” on page 88 for floor layouts that specify printer dimensions, service clearance,power cable, and cable locations.

Figure 4. Duplex inline configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6, TD1/2, TD3/4, and TD5/6 withWeb Cooling System Feature Code 9231 or 4231


Left-Angle Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2, HD3/4,HD5/6, TD1/2, TD3/4, and TD5/6 with Web Cooling System

(1) Optional preprocessing device attached to Printer 1(2) Control Unit attached to Printer 1(3) Printer 1 print engine(4) Vacuum Unit*(5) Cooling Tower*(6) Air Bearing Turnbar with 90° turn*(7) Air Supply Unit*(8) Control Unit attached to Printer 2(9) Printer 2 print engine(10) Optional postprocessing device attached to Printer 2



Figure 5. Left-angle duplex configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6, TD1/2, TD3/4, and TD5/6with Web Cooling System Feature Code 9230 or 4230


‘H’ Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6,TD1/2, and TD3/4 with Web Cooling System

(1) Optional preprocessing device attached to Printer 1(2) Control Unit attached to Printer 1(3) Printer 1 print engine(4) Vacuum Unit*(5) Cooling Tower*(6) Air Supply Unit*(7) Air Bearing Turnbar with 90° turn*(8) Walkover*(9) Control Unit attached to Printer 2(10) Printer 2 print engine(11) Optional postprocessing device attached to Printer 2



Figure 6. ‘H’ Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6, TD1/2, TD3/4, and TD5/6 with WebCooling System Feature Code 9232 or 4232


Left-Angle Configuration for Dual Simplex Printing without WebCooling System

(1) Optional preprocessing device attached to Printer 1(2) Control Unit attached to Printer 1(3) Printer 1 print engine(4) Optional preprocessing device attached to Printer 2(5) Optional postprocessing device for Printer 1(6) Control Unit attached to Printer 2(7) Printer 2 print engine(8) Postprocessing device attached to Printer 2

Figure 7. Left-Angle Configuration for Dual Simplex Printing without Web Cooling System


Inline Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2 or TD1/2 withoutWeb Cooling System

(1) Optional preprocessing device attached to Printer 1(2) Control Unit attached to Printer 1(3) Printer 1 print engine(4) Tall Buffer/Flipper Unit(5) Control Unit attached to Printer 2(6) Printer 2 print engine(7) Optional postprocessing device attached to Printer 2


Figure 8. Duplex inline configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2 or TD1/2 without Web Cooling System


Inline Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models HD3/4 or TD3/4 withoutWeb Cooling System

(1) Optional preprocessing device attached to Printer 1(2) Control Unit attached to Printer 1(3) Printer 1 print engine(4) Air Bearing Flipper Unit(5) Control Unit attached to Printer 2(6) Printer 2 print engine(7) Optional postprocessing device attached to Printer 2


Important

v Item (4), the Air Bearing Buffer/Flipper Unit, must be specified for use in the duplex inlineconfiguration. See “Air Bearing Flipper and Tall Buffer/Flipper Unit” on page 9.

Figure 9. Duplex inline configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models HD3/4 or TD3/4 without Web Cooling System


Inline Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models HD5/6 without WebCooling System

(1) Optional preprocessing device attached to Printer 1(2) Control Unit attached to Printer 1(3) Printer 1 print engine(4) Tall Buffer/Flipper Unit(5) Air Bearing Flipper Unit(6) Control Unit attached to Printer 2(7) Printer 2 print engine(8) Optional postprocessing device attached to Printer 2


Important

v Items (4), the Tall Buffer/Flipper Unit and (5), the Air Bearing Buffer/Flipper Unit, must be specifiedfor use in the duplex inline configuration. See “Air Bearing Flipper and Tall Buffer/Flipper Unit” onpage 9.

Figure 10. Duplex inline configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models HD5/6 or TD5/6 without Web Cooling System


Left-Angle Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2, HD3/4,HD5/6, TD1/2, and TD3/4 without Web Cooling System

(1) Optional preprocessing device attached to Printer 1(2) Control Unit attached to Printer 1(3) Printer 1 print engine(4) Tall Buffer/Flipper Unit(5) Control Unit attached to Printer 2(6) Printer 2 print engine(7) Optional postprocessing device attached to Printer 2


Figure 11. Left-angle duplex configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6, TD1/2, TD3/4, and TD5/6without Web Cooling System


‘H’ Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6,TD1/2, and TD3/4 without Web Cooling System

(1) Optional preprocessing device attached to Printer 1(2) Control Unit attached to Printer 1(3) Printer 1 print engine(4) Tall Buffer/Flipper Unit*(5) Optional Turnbar with 90° turn (air bearing may be required for high-speed models)(6) Printer 2 print engine(7) Control Unit attached to Printer 2(8) Optional postprocessing device attached to Printer 2(9) Optional walkover*

* Provided with a Feature Code from Ricoh.


Important

v Item (4), the Tall Buffer/Flipper Unit, must be specified for use in the 'H' duplex configuration. See“Air Bearing Flipper and Tall Buffer/Flipper Unit” on page 9.

v An additional in-line urge unit may be required between the air bearing turnbars at position 9 in theillustration, depending on web length and layout between engines.

v Optional Pre and Postprocessing equipment is not provided by Ricoh, contact a pre/post vendor.

Figure 12. ‘H’ Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6, TD1/2, TD3/4, and TD5/6 without WebCooling System


Basic Page-Printing ConceptsThe printer expands your printing ability to include new functions, such as in-house publishing, imageprinting, and electronic forms creation. These special uses are made possible by the Advanced FunctionPresentation (AFP) licensed programs1. The AFP™ programs let you put text, image, graphics, and barcodes at any defined point on a page. This ability is called all-points addressability.

Some printers print a single line as a unit. This process is known as line printing. The printer and AFPcreate and print an entire page as a unit. This approach, known as page printing, increases your flexibilityin designing pages.

Combining Text with ImagesMany companies use system printers to generate memos, reports, invoices, and listings. This output oftenconsists of text combined with simple charts or diagrams that include limited graphics.

In systems with Advanced Function Presentation programs installed, InfoPrint advanced function printerscan print illustrations in your documents. For example, the program can combine business graphs anddrawings with text for use in manuals and reports.

Figure 13 shows how images can include line drawings, graphics, designs, special symbols, and companylogos. You can print them alone or with text, and you can print more than one image on a single page.

1. A licensed program is any separately-priced program that has a Ricoh copyright and is offered to customers under the terms andconditions of the Agreement for Ricoh Licensed Programs.

Pump Maintenance

A2

3I0

02

8

Water TemperatureRegulator

Tightening Specifications

Figure 13. Combined images and text


Orienting Text and Images on a Page

With an advanced function printer, you can print text and images in any of four orientations on a page, asshown in Figure 14.

Thi

ste

xtis

orie

nted

270

onth

epa

ge.

This

text isoriented

90on

thepage.

Thistextisoriented180onthepage.

This text is oriented0 on the page.

Paper moves through the printerin this direction.

A23

I002

9

Figure 14. Available orientations


Portrait OrientationText and images printed parallel to the shorter side of the forms are in a portrait orientation.

Landscape OrientationText and images printed parallel to the longer side of the forms are in a landscape orientation.

July 21, 1986

Cox, Sutton and Company1007 E. Newgate StreetChicago, Illinois

SUBJECT: Lorna Hamblin Miller's Column

Dear Mr. Cox;

BUSINESS EDUCATION SHIFTS FROM SCHOOLS TO COMPANIES

July 21, 1986



Dear Mr. Cox;


The universal problem of low competency in basic English skills is ofconcern to everyone in business. Word processing supervisors and managers areprobably the people most acutely affected by the general disabilities that many

The universal problem of low competency in basic English skills is ofconcern to everyone in business. Word processing supervisors and managers areprobably the people most acutely affected by the general disabilities that many

entry-level employees exhibit. Never-the-less, upper management and employersin general, must adjust their thinking toward solutions (involving bothbudgetary and personnel policies) that will upgrade the quantity and qualityof office output.

entry-level employees exhibit. Never-the-less, upper management and employersin general, must adjust their thinking toward solutions (involving bothbudgetary and personnel policies) that will upgrade the quantity and qualityof office output.

Without defending the schools, perhaps it would help to look at the broadpicture. In one generation, a complete revolution has occurred as to thedefinition of education, the demographies of the school population, and the

Without defending the schools, perhaps it would help to look at the broadpicture. In one generation, a complete revolution has occurred as to thedefinition of education, the demographies of the school population, and the

range of entry-level employment. It is not easy to shift responsibility afterdramatic social restructuring. For new problems, we need new solutions.

Sincerely,

James R. Smith

range of entry-level employment. It is not easy to shift responsibility afterdramatic social restructuring. For new problems, we need new solutions.

Sincerely,

James R. Smith

A23

I002

6

Figure 15. Portrait orientations

ASSETSASSETS

A23

I002

7

ROCK SOLID CORPORATIONBALANCE SHEET

ROCK SOLID CORPORATIONBALANCE SHEET

Figure 16. Landscape orientations


Normal and Tumble DuplexBy using a combination of printing directions and orientations, you can put a document together in fourdifferent ways. Figure 17 shows documents printed with normal duplex. Notice that the pages are printedin the portrait orientation for Document A and in the landscape orientation for Document B.

Figure 18 shows documents printed with tumble duplex. Notice that the pages are printed in the portraitorientation for Document C and in the landscape orientation for Document D.

Normal Duplex Sheet

Normal Duplex Sheet

Document B

Document A

Beginning of page 101

End of page 100

Top

Top

Bot

tom

Bottom


End of page 100 Bottom

Top

Top

Bot

tom

A26

C00

68

Figure 17. Normal duplex

Tumble Duplex Sheet

Tumble Duplex Sheet

Document C

Document D


End of page 100

Top

Bottom

Top

Bottom


End of page 100

Bottom

Top

Top

Bottom

A26

C00

69

Figure 18. Tumble duplex


Advanced Function Image and GraphicsThe Advanced Function Image and Graphics facility within the printer controller allows the printer todirectly process IOCA (Image Object Content Architecture) images, and GOCA (Graphics Object ContentArchitecture) data, as described in the Intelligent Printer Data Stream Reference.

Improved processing occurs with the use of compressed images or vector graphics data in the GOCAformat by reducing demand on adapter data transfer and host storage.

When the printer decompresses images or rasterizes vectors instead of the host system, host systemprocessing cycles are reduced. These data stream functions also allow the printer to perform scalingoperations or resolution correction of scanned images.

Multiple-up Printing

Basic N-up Page PositioningWith N-Up Page Positioning, you can print up to four pages in partitions on one side of a form, whichenables you to print much more data on a form, saving printer-usage costs, paper, and storage space.See Table 4 on page 48 for a listing of Print Services Facility (PSF) software that supports N-Up printing.Figure 19 is an example of 2-up printing.

NW

TI0

004

Water TemperatureRegulator

Tightening Specifications

July 21, 1986



Dear Mr. Cox;


The universal problem of low competency in basic English skills is ofconcern to everyone in business. Word processing supervisors and managers areprobably the people most acutely affected by the general disabilities that manyentry-level employees exhibit. Never-the-less, upper management and employersin general, must adjust their thinking toward solutions (involving bothbudgetary and personnel policies) that will upgrade the quantity and qualityof office output.

Without defending the schools, perhaps it would help to look at the broadpicture. In one generation, a complete revolution has occurred as to thedefinition of education, the demographies of the school population, and therange of entry-level employment. It is not easy to shift responsibility afterdramatic social restructuring. For new problems, we need new solutions.

Sincerely,

James R. Smith

Figure 19. 2-up printing


Enhanced N-up Page PositioningWith Enhanced N-Up Page Positioning, you can place up to four pages at any location on a form—bothsides of the form for duplex systems— in any orientation, and of any size. Refer to the appropriate PSFpublication for your system for more information. See Table 4 on page 48 for a listing of PSF software thatsupports Enhanced N-Up printing.

Cut Sheet EmulationCut Sheet Emulation (CSE) is an option that automatically invokes an Enhanced N-Up arrangement toemulate 2 side-by-side sheets of cut paper. Duplex jobs print page 2 on the back of page 1 and page 4 onthe back of page 3. CSE provides for different page arrangements to accommodate differentpostprocessing requirements. Pages can be placed sequentially from left to right or right to left and rightside up or upside down.

A default value for CSE is set in the printer definition. Different CSE values can be set when form valuesare established. The default setting is used for all forms that do not have a different value defined.

CSE requires support in Print Services Facility™ (PSF). The console option for CSE has no effect unlessthe printer has a PSF that supports CSE. See Table 4 on page 48 for a listing of PSF software thatsupports CSE printing. For more information on PSF, refer to the appropriate PSF publication.

When the CSE option is enabled, all jobs sent to the printer print 2-up, side by side except when:

v N-Up Page Positioning is specified in the form definition. In this case, the N-Up specification is usedand CSE is ignored.

v The PSF print driver enables page-size verification and disables CSE for pages that do not fit 2-Up.

Options for Multiple-up PrintingWith Page Positioning and Cut Sheet Emulation (CSE) to choose from, you now have several options forformatting multiple-up application pages on a single printer sheet:

v Multiple-Up defined in the page definition resource

v N-Up defined in the form definition resource

v Cut Sheet Emulation selected at the touch panel.

Applications printing simple line data that use the same formatting for each page can easily be handledwith traditional multiple-up. They can be handled as well by N-Up Page Positioning and Cut SheetEmulation if they do not require more than 4 pages for N-Up or more than 2 for CSE on printers thatsupport N-Up and CSE.

CSE can be used whenever the desired output is 2 pages of equal size side by side on the same sheet.CSE is especially useful for moving applications from 8.5 x 11 in. forms to 2-up printing on 11 x 17 in.forms. No change is required to the AFP form definition resource to enable CSE 2-Up printing. The sameform definition can be used for printing 1-up on 8.5 x 11 in. forms or 2-up on 11 x 17 in. forms.

N-Up Page Positioning is needed for applications that required pages of different sizes or page positioningother than 2-up side by side. Instructions must be placed in the form definition for N-Up printing.

Using Stored Information

Several types of stored information are used when printing data on Advanced Function Printing System.For example, your company logo often appears in your printed output. You can code this logo one time,and then store it in a library where it is available to any authorized person.

Advanced Function Printing System use information from resource libraries. A resource is a collection ofstored data that can be used in a printing job. Some resource libraries contain control information thatconverts data from line printing to page printing. Examples of this type of library include:


v Form definition libraries, that contain the specifications to describe how pages of data are placed on thephysical media

v Page definition libraries, that contain the specifications to describe how line data is placed into pages.

Other resource libraries contain information that the program uses to compose pages. Examples of thistype of library include:

v Font libraries, which contain characters to be printed.

v Page segment libraries, which contain images and graphics.

v Overlay libraries, which contain collections of unchanging data that can contain images, text, orcombinations of both.

Instead of using preprinted forms, you can use electronic overlays to put boxes, lines, shading, text, andlogos on a page. Using electronic overlays can result in significant savings in forms cost and storagespace, as well as operator time required to load and unload preprinted forms. Also, you can changeelectronic overlays more quickly and without paying the scrap charges you have when you changepreprinted forms.

Although Ricoh provides some of these resources for common uses, Advanced Function Presentationlicensed programs enable your company to customize its own resources. See “InfoPrint AdvancedFunction Presentation Software” on page 73 for more information about these programs.

TrueType/OpenType Fonts and Unicode print dataThe TrueType font technology, developed by Apple and Microsoft™, is the most prevalent font technologyin the industry today. It is an open font standard that is widely published. The OpenType font format is anextension of the TrueType format that allows better support for international character sets, and broadermulti-platform support. OpenType includes information needed to fully support Unicode data for multilingualprint and presentation using a single font. It also provides the flexibility of allowing either TrueType outlinesor the other standard font technology, Adobe Type 1, to be packaged as an OpenType font.

These new offerings provide significant benefits:

v You will have more choices in selecting typefaces, especially for non-Latin languages

v They provide a truly multilingual environment through support of Unicode, enabling the globalization ofapplications

v You can print from Windows™ applications with the same fonts that appear on the screen

These offerings are supported on all InfoPrint 4100 models.

Enhanced Toner LoadingEnhanced toner loading is standard on all printers.

This facility allows the operator to add toner to the printer while it is operating. The operator is promptedby an operator console message that the toner supply is low.

Magnetic Ink Character Recognition (MICR) CCDThe Customer Changeable Developer (CCD) on the InfoPrint 4100 enables you to print MICR applicationson the InfoPrint 4100 Family of high-speed, continuous forms printers. The MICR CCD Feature (FC 9471)is supported on InfoPrint 4100 Models HS2, HS3, HD3/4, HD5/6, TS2, TS3, TD3/4, and TD5/6. Thisfeature provides the following benefits:

v Easily switch from printing production black toner applications to printing MICR checks simply byswitching the developer.


v Exceptional MICR read rates are obtained by using the print quality enhancements and 600 DPI outputof the InfoPrint 4100 along with the newly developed outline MICR font.

v Print the same MICR applications on the InfoPrint 4100 Families.

Note: A developer cart DOES NOT ship standard with the initial order MICR CCD Feature (FC 9471). Adeveloper cart is included with the Additional MICR CCD Feature (FC 4481)

See “Magnetic ink character recognition (MICR)” for more information about using the MICR CCD.

Magnetic ink character recognition (MICR)Magnetic ink character recognition (MICR) is a specified character set that is defined in American NationalStandard Institute (ANSI) booklet X9.27. For over thirty years, MICR has been the common documentlanguage used by the commercial banking industry for interbank exchange of money data.

The most common use of MICR is for printing negotiable documents. The characters are uniquely shapedaccording to ANSI standards and can be read by various readers and sorters throughout the world todirect the documents to their proper financial institutions.

Before the availability of MICR printers, companies that printed negotiable documents used forms thatwere pre-printed with MICR characters by a commercial check-printing company. Commercial companiesprint the MICR characters with magnetic ink.

To enable a printing system to print MICR, the MICR Feature must be installed and the printer operatormust install the MICR configured CCD into the correct engine. Refer to InfoPrint 4100 Models with theInfoPrint Controller Operator Console: Operator's Guide for instructions on changing the customerchangeable developer (CCD).

Notes:

1. In duplex mode on InfoPrint 4100 Models HD3/4, HD5/6, TD3/4, and TD5/6, MICR toner can be usedin Printer 1 only.

2. In dual simplex mode, MICR toner can be used in both printers.

3. The supported paper weight is 75 to 90 gsm (20 to 24 lb). Paper checks are to be 24 lb across theweb and in the web direction or 20 lb in the web direction only. (This is the banking industry standardfor check stock.)

4. Tractorless paper is not supported with MICR.

5. MICR forms must be processed into a post processing device to allow sufficient cooling for the tonerand paper.

Using the InfoPrint 4100 to print MICR documentsRicoh has long been associated with the negotiable document industry in the form of designing encodersand readers/sorters, and has an understanding of the importance of MICR print quality.

The InfoPrint 4100 printers use a specially designed magnetic toner that can print MICR characters with aquality that meets ANSI standards and can withstand the many passes through readers and sorters.

With the Advanced Function Printing (AFP) software interface that is available with all InfoPrint systemprinters, the InfoPrint 4100 can be used to print an entire negotiable document; bypassing commercialcheck-printing companies and the necessity for pre-printed forms.

The most common use of MICR is for check printing. Specifications of standards requirements for checkprinting are in the ANSI booklets X9.27 and X9.13.


Notes:

1. There must not be any printing in the area that is the clear band area of the front of the check.

2. It is recommended that MICR character printing be done with the MICR character line printed in thescan direction only.

3. A special MICR toner is used in the printer, which contains iron particles. The print does not look asblack as with non-MICR toners. This should not be considered a problem, because it is a characteristicof MICR toner.

Setting up the printer for printing with MICR tonerThe following procedure describes how to set required values when printing with MICR toner. Thesevalues must be set on the printer where the MICR toner is installed.

Company Name HerePERSONAL HEALTH ACCOUNT

NOT NEGOTIABLE

Giant SaguaroInsurance CompanyClaim Services Provider

Pay

To theOrder of

Date

Control No. Amount

Patient

May 7, 2001

FORTY-FIVE DOLLARS AND 60 CENTS

JOHN P HASTINGS

132 CALLE DEL CIELO

TUCSON AZ 85718

MARY HASTINGS

17434-66 ***45 60

This Check is VOID after 90 DAYS

State BankTucson, AZ

6 7 0 8 6 9 0 5 3

AV

1U00

20

Figure 20. Front of check

Figure 21. Back of check


Note: Access the printer settings from the Main touchscreen panel of the Enhanced Operator panel.

1. Select Printer Definition → Print Quality to display the Print Quality panel.

2. Select the following values:

v Contrast = 4

Note: You may need to adjust this to obtain proper signal strength.

v Boldness

– For 240 and 300 DPI fonts = 50

– For outline fonts (480 and 600 DPI) = 50

– For CMC7 outline font = 60

v Preheat Platen Temperature = 85

v Fuser Temperature = 50(Hot Roll)

v Oil Rate = 50

v Oil Belt speed = 50

v Backup Idler Roll usage = Enable

3. Select Printer Definition → Printer → Advanced → Font Smoothing to display the Printer - Advancedpanel.

Set the following values:

v Single-byte Font Smoothing = No

v Double-byte Font Smoothing = No

MICR fontsIn addition to the normal fonts supplied with the printer, three standard fonts are available to print MICRcharacters: E13B, E13B*, and CMC7.

The E13B font is used in the United States and the CMC7 font is used in certain countries in Europe. TheHollow E13B* font is identical in size to the E13B font, but will not be read correctly by MICR reader-sorterequipment. This font can be used for application development while the security of the E13B font ismaintained.

Test documents that contain Hollow E13B* font will exhibit the same registration characteristics as theE13B font, but the documents will not be negotiable.

AFP MICR fonts for InfoPrint 4100 printers are available for downloading atwww.infoprintsolutionscompany.com

MICR format requirementsThe MICR line has an established format that can cause rejects if the format conventions are not followed.The MICR line is composed of four fields. The fields are, from right to left:

v Amount field, positions 1–12

v On-Us field, positions 14–31

v Transit field, positions 33–43

v External process control field, position 44 (optional)

v Auxiliary On-Us field, positions 45–65 (optional)

The following figure shows the MICR line field positions for a 152 mm (6 in.) check.


Amount field, Positions 1–12: The amount field is fixed by convention as follows:

v Position 1 contains the amount symbol.

v Positions 2 and 3 contain the cents amount.

v Positions 4 to 11 contain the dollar amount. An added zero fills each position to the left the dollaramount, up to and including position 11.

v Position 12 contains the amount symbol.

On-us field, positions 14–31: The arrangement of characters and symbols in the on-us field isdetermined by the bank the checks are drawn on. These characters must be reproduced exactly as thebank has specified. Consultation with the bank is highly recommended.

Transit field, positions 33–43: The transit field identifies the institution upon which the check is drawn.The field is fixed by convention as follows:

v Position 33 contains the transit symbol.

v Position 34 contains the check digit.

v Positions 35 to 38 contain the ABA bank number (numerator).

Note: In Canada a dash symbol is required in position 37.

v Positions 39 to 42 contain the routing number (denominator).

v Position 43 contains the transit symbol.

External process control field, position 44 (optional): This field is used only for items that are notrequired to be returned to the issuing institution. The character to use is controlled by the ANSI committeeon banking standards.

Auxiliary on-us field, positions 45–65 (optional): The arrangement of characters and symbols in theauxiliary on-us field is determined by the bank the checks are drawn on. The field usually contains thecheck serial number bracketed by on-us symbols. This field can be used only for checks longer than 152mm (6 in.). The content of this field can begin in position 49.

TRANSIT NUMBERFIELD

ON-USFIELD

AMOUNTFIELD

CLEARBAND

YOUR COMPANYDIVISIONSTREET ADDRESSCITY, STATE ZIP

5106

PAY TO THEORDER OF

20

$

91-2/1221

MEMO

DOLLARS

YOUR BANK

44 43 33 31 14 12 1

AV

1U00

22

Figure 22. MICR line field positions


MICR quality controlIf used correctly, the InfoPrint 4100 will produce quality MICR documents. To produce quality MICRdocuments consistently, you must monitor both the application program and the printer output to be sureboth are within banking specifications. You must assume responsibility for the quality of the documentsreleased into the banking system. The banking system must assume the responsibility of having adequate,properly maintained reader systems.

A special MICR toner is used in the printer, which contains iron particles. The print does not look as blackas with non-MICR toners. This should not be considered a problem, because it is a characteristic of MICRtoner.

The strength of signal that is generated in the MICR readers by MICR characters is a function of themagnetic strength and size of the iron particles, the amount of iron particles in the toner, the amount oftoner placed on the paper (pile height), and the relative shape of the printed characters. Most readers readthe relative length of the vertical edges/transitions of the characters. Increasing the amount of iron on thepage will produce stronger signals at the magnetic character reader. Too little MICR toner on the page willproduce a low signal and increase the reject rate. Too much MICR toner will produce pile height that is toohigh and can contaminate the check reading equipment.

The operator can adjust the MICR signal strength by adjusting the contrast setting. Changing the contrastsettings will vary the amount of toner on the paper. When the signal strength is too low, a higher contrastsetting can be selected. When the signal is too high a lower contrast setting can be selected.

A MICR verifier/analyzer device (which should be made available by the customer for operator andCustomer Support Specialist use) is required to achieve the best signal strength. Correct characterposition can be assured using an overlay or Glarden Gauge. Ricoh requires that these devices meet ANSIStandard X9.27-1995 or higher, for Magnetic Ink Character Printing (MICR). An operator must vary thecontrast setting until good MICR signals are obtained. Experience has shown that a check average of 110- 140% of the standard, for all characters on the page, is usually the best signal strength to obtain.However, the standard lower and upper limits for each character are 50% and 200% respectively. Sincethere is a variety of check stock papers and since paper characteristics can effect signal strength, thecontrast setting may need to be readjusted for each check stock paper the customer uses. InfoPrintprinters can store these parameters for a large number of forms in snapshots.

Quality control tools: To correctly evaluate the quality of MICR printing on the InfoPrint 4100, you willneed the following tools:

v MICR printing and layout gauge

A MICR registration and layout gauge (Glarden gauge) is supplied with various MICR test devices. Thegauge tests the placement of the MICR characters on the page. It can also be used to verify registrationand to check the clear band area. Check the clear band area on the back side of the check also,because the magnetic materials read through the paper.

v Clear band overlay

The clear band overlay is a mask that blocks from view everything except the clear band and is used tocheck for extraneous toner that may appear on the printed sheet. The MICR layout gauge can be usedfor this function if the MICR line appears on the bottom of the sheet.

If you design your forms with the MICR line other than on the bottom of the sheet, you should make amask for each application. For example, if you plan to print documents with three checks on a sheet,make a mask from clear plastic that blocks all areas other than the three-field MICR line.

v MICR signal strength tester

A signal strength tester may be used to determine the magnetic signal strength of the MICR charactersbecause it is not possible to determine the magnetic signal strength by visual examination.

You will need to obtain a signal strength MICR check reader to assure acceptability of your MICRprinting.


MICR quality and format verificationThe MICR quality check verifies registration, clear band, voids, and signal strength. The format checkverifies that the correct MICR information is being printed on its specified position on the document. Toverify the quality and format requires a periodic sampling of the printed sheets.

Sampling frequency: The frequency of checking MICR print quality is based on how many prints theuser is willing to reprint should a problem be detected. Greatest attention should be paid at the beginningof a MICR job. The schedule below can serve as a guide for MICR printing applications. With experience,the user of the InfoPrint 4100 will discover the best verification frequency.

Time Action

Start of job MICR quality check and format check

Every 2 hours MICR quality check

Change of forms MICR quality check

Vertical registration: The InfoPrint 4100 places characters in the same place from page to page withinthe specifications of MICR printing. The MICR layout gauge measures registration and characterplacement. The MICR document is inserted into the gauge, and the right-hand edge is aligned with theright side of the gauge. The printer prints approximately three pages per each revolution of the imagingdrum. Therefore three consecutive pages should be examined to verify that the characters are alignedvertically and centered within the boxes.

Vertical registration can be adjusted on the touchscreen.

Horizontal registration: In the US, ensure correct horizontal registration by examining character box 33.This box should contain the transit symbol. Ideal placement is for the right edge of the transit symbol toline up with the right side of character box 33. The right side of the transit symbol can be no more thanhalf of a character box left or right of the right side of the box.

Horizontal registration can be adjusted on the touchscreen.

Clear band area: The clear band area is the bottom 15.875 mm (0.625 in.) of a MICR document. Thisarea can contain only MICR characters. The application program must not contain any instruction to printin this area. Because the InfoPrint 4100 printers use magnetic toner, borders and signatures that stray intothe clear band area can cause rejects. To avoid such rejects, it is recommended that the clear band areabe 19 mm (0.75 in.).

The printer prints three 8.5" x 11" pages per each revolution of the imaging drum. Therefore, a defect inthe drum will appear at every three images. Three consecutive pages should be checked for extraneoustoner using a mask or the layout gauge to examine the clear band on each page. Extraneous toner largerthan 0.076 x 0.076 mm (0.003 x 0.003 in.) should not be in the clear band area. If extraneous toner canbe seen at a normal reading distance, the documents should not be put into circulation.

Voids: Voids are the opposite of extraneous toner. Voids or malformed characters cause distortion in themagnetic signals read by a reader/sorter to determine what a character is. Characters must not contain avoid larger than 0.203 x 0.203 mm (0.008 x 0.008 in.). Check three consecutive pages for voids. A void isacceptable if it is barely discernible at normal reading distance; however, numerous voids indicate thatthese documents should not be put into circulation.

Customer Changeable DeveloperThis new solution allows customer operators to easily remove and install developer units so that the tonercan easily be switched from black to MICR or from MICR to black.


Additional Customer Changeable DevelopersThis feature provides an additional developer unit that can be installed by an operator to replace thedeveloper unit initially shipped with an InfoPrint 4100 printer. Each additional CCD is unique to one printer.For example, to have additional CCDs for three printers requires that this feature be ordered for each ofthe three printers.

The Additional CCD feature consists of an operator-installable developer and one developer cart to carrythe CCD provided by this feature. When this feature is ordered, it may be necessary to order a DeveloperCart. This extra Developer Cart is needed once per print room to remove and store the CCD initiallyinstalled in the printer.

Developer CartIn addition to the Developer Cart shipped with the additional CCD feature, one additional Developer Cart isrequired per print room for the removal of the CCD that was initially installed in the printer.

The developer carts are used so that the developer unit does not have to be lifted or carried by theoperator. The cart attaches to the printer so that the developer unit can slide onto the cart when it is beingswitched. Likewise, the new developer unit can be easily slid off the cart and installed in the printer.

Developer carts can be used with any developer. Once a CCD has been installed in a printer, the cart thatwas shipped with the CCD can be used to remove a CCD from another printer. Developer units are uniqueto a given printer.



Chapter 2. Specifications

Chapter OverviewThis chapter describes the characteristics, functions, and features of the printers. It also containshardware and software requirements for incorporating the printer into your operating and applicationenvironments.

The printers provide high-performance, high-quality printing in large-scale data-processing environments.They receive data through the InfoPrint Intelligent Printer Data Stream™ (IPDS).

Printing SpeedPrinting speed and options are defined in “System Characteristics” on page 2.

The following conditions affect the actual performance in your installation:

v Configuration of the printer

v Number of characters per page

v Number of imbedded control commands

v Number of fonts, bar codes, and images per page

v Performance of the controlling computer

v Channel or LAN bandwidth

v Channel activity

v Use of image operations (scaling, rotation)

v Amount of image and graphics area

v Layering of images and other objects

v Page arrangement and use of wide media

See “Performance Considerations” on page 71 for additional information.

Print MaterialThe size limitations and options for the InfoPrint 4100 Models HS2, HS3, HD3/4, HD5/6, TS2, TS3, TD3/4,and TD5/6 printer forms are listed in “System Characteristics” on page 2.

The printer can print on many special-purpose materials, such as preprinted forms. The inks, papers,adhesives, and other components that make up these special materials must withstand the printer's fusingtemperature and mechanical action; therefore, be sure to thoroughly test any preprinted forms you plan touse for your printing applications.

The Forms Design Reference for Continuous Forms Advanced Function Printers contains information tohelp you select print materials. Work closely with your marketing representative while you are selectingwhat kinds of forms and special-purpose materials to use. Your marketing representative can give youtechnical help, share information from other successful printer users, and help you design your ownspecial materials. Refer to Chapter 6, “Selecting and Testing Forms,” on page 105 for more information.

Basis weight is the weight in pounds of four reams (500 sheets) of paper cut to a given standard size. Inmost environments, 75 g/m2 (20-pound) forms usually perform best for the printers. The basis weights forthe various models of printers is listed in “System Characteristics” on page 2.

35

With fanfold forms in duplex printing mode, you can use a postprocessing device behind Printer 2. Apostprocessing device prevents stacking problems caused by the occasional loss of the fold directionmemory after the paper travels through both printers and the Buffer/Flipper Unit.

For instructions for printing on various size forms, see “Continuous Forms” on page 105.

Print QualityThe forms you use and the composition of your logical pages significantly affect the quality of your printeroutput. To ensure printing legibility in your application, test small fonts and special characters, such aslogos, bar codes, and OCR fonts, in your application. See Chapter 6, “Selecting and Testing Forms,” onpage 105 and the Forms Design Reference for Continuous Forms Advanced Function Printers forimportant information about this type of testing.

Some print quality issues can be addressed by adjusting the values set in the Forms Settings panel(Forms → Forms Settings) and the Print Quality panel (Printer Definition → Print Quality). SeeChapter 8, “Establishing Form Settings,” on page 151 and “Understanding Print Quality” on page 160 formore information.

Flexible halftone selection may be available at the printer console, depending on installed options andmicrocode level. You can select different halftones for different page components based on size and type,for optimum print quality. Intelligent halftone selection can be performed for existing non-screenedapplications.

When using InfoPrint Manager, you must ensure that you are using the correct halftones for the type oftoner being used in your printer. Options in InfoPrint Manager allow you to select halftones based on thetoner type. See the documentation for InfoPrint Manager for more information.

Intelligent Halftone SelectionThe most commonly used InfoPrint halftones are known as super cell halftones with 256 levels of gray,which produces optimum print quality with larger images.

Single cell halftones are used with smaller images and color/gray text because they render finer details.Single cell halftones may also be used for larger images when the details are more important as inapplications such as license plate numbers.


In order to use intelligent halftone selection, your printer must meet the following prerequisites:

v IP4100 printers with the InfoPrint controller

v Micro code level 15.7.153 and higher

v The AFP Color Emulation Feature

v Data must arrive at the printer in a non-screened format to have halftone and tone transfer curveoptions applied

The halftones available to the printer are:

v Super cell (Super): currently in use today for all images and text. Super cell will be used for largerimages and text with the new intelligent function.

v Single cell (Single): can be used for small images and text

v Legacy (AFCCU): IP4100 controller and halftones in use before the InfoPrint Controller was introduced

UsageFor intelligent halftone switching, the customer specifies a threshold on the printer console so the printerknows which halftone to apply to a data type.

v For text, this threshold is specified in points.

v For image, this threshold is specified in inches or millimeters.

Tone Transfer Curve (TTC) is also selectable at the printer console to adjust the dot gain or "look" of animage.

v Tone transfer curves options:

– Highlight midtone, dark, dark2, accutone, standard, and none.

v Selected TTC applies to all data in a job.

v Is independent of the type of halftone used (AFCCU, super cell, single cell)

v Highlight midtone is calibrated into the InfoPrint Controller monochrome halftones so highlight midtoneand none produce the same result.

Super-Cell Single-Cell� Super-Cell halftones render 256 shades of gray.

Single-cell halftones render fine details.

Contouring

Finerdetail

Small text less coarse

g6au

s026

Figure 23. Halftone Comparisons for Images and Text

Chapter 2. Specifications 37

Data Types and Halftone Optionsv Text includes PTOCA, GOCA text, and BCOCA HRI.

v Text uses text halftone threshold.

v Image and draw rules use image halftone threshold.

Table 2. Data Types and Halftone Options

Data Type \Halftone Option

Legacy Super Single IntelligentIntelligent

Legacy

Text AFCCU Super Single Super/Single AFCCU/Single

Draw Rules AFCCU Super Single Super/Single AFCCU/Single

GOCA AFCCU Super Single Super AFCCU

BCOCA AFCCU Super Single Super AFCCU

Object AreaShading

AFCCU Super Single Super AFCCU

Image AFCCU Super Single Super/Single AFCCU/Single

Console Selections for HalftonesThe following pages shows the new printer console selections for the halftones.

The new function is found on the printer console under: Printer definition → Print quality → Halftones/TTCs

g6au

s027

Figure 24. Location of the Halftones / TTC Button on the Print Quality Menu


g6au

s028

Figure 25. Halftone Menug6

aus0

29

Figure 26. Selecting Intelligent Text and Image Halftone


Note: If the printer is running in Save Pages Mode (Optimize for Copies on InfoPrint Manager), anychange done on the printer console concerning halftoning will require a Restart of the printer.

Print Quality EnhancementThe Print Quality Enhancement facility within the printer consists of three items: edge smoothing, finefidelity protection, and boldness control.

v Edge Smoothing: This is smoothing along the edges of diagonal lines. This function provides moredefined and crisp character and graphics images. If selected, additional smoothing algorithms areapplied when 240 and 300 PEL raster font data is printed.

v Fine Fidelity Protection: Protects fine details in the print and prevents blurring between details bycompletely filling solid areas or by not filling in single-pel white areas. For example, if there are severalblack lines next to each other and there is only one white pel between the lines, fine fidelity protectionensures that the white pel is not filled with toner and the white space between the lines is preserved.Another example is that when a character is printed, toner is applied from edge to edge of the characterto completely fill in the character and thus avoid white spaces between the edges.

v Boldness Control: Controls print boldness, independent of the contrast setting. This allows you tochange the print boldness to compensate for other changing conditions within the printer withoutaffecting the solid area darkness.

AFP Color Emulation Feature (FC 4850 or 4851)The AFP Color Emulation feature prints color objects in grayscale on an InfoPrint 4100 duplex or dualsimplex system with the InfoPrint Controller. This feature allows you to design and migrate your color AFPapplications to full-color AFP printers. External transforms are no longer needed because the InfoPrintController does the transformations.

Note: This feature is supported on InfoPrint 4100 Models MD2, HD4, HD6, TD2, TD4, or TD6 printers withthe InfoPrint controller. It also requires the IPDS Performance Upgrade (Feature Code 4664).

Applications can now be designed using the following color objects and printed as-is on the InfoPrint 4100:

g6au

s030

Figure 27. Selecting None for Intelligent Text and Image Halftone


v TIFF images

v GIF images

v JPEG/JFIF images

v IPDS IOCA (FS11) support and check printing

v IPDS IOCA (FS45)

Simulating Color with Gray PrintingThis standard feature, sometimes referred to as gray-scale printing, simulates color using gray tones,allowing color Advanced Function Printing™ (AFP) jobs to be printed on InfoPrint 4100 printing systems.This minimizes the need for duplicate print applications, one for color printers and one for monochromeprinters.

Simulating color with grayPrinter Definition → PDL → IPDS

The Gray-Scale feature accepts the following AFP color objects and converts them to shades of gray:

v PTOCA text

v GOCA graphics

v Color object areas and logical pages

v Bi-level IOCA images (FS10)

v Color BCOCA bar codes

Note: Continuous tone color IOCA images (FS45) are not supported by this feature.

Other kinds of color objects may need to be transformed before printing. Ricoh includes color transforms inthe following program products:

v In z/OS environments, Infoprint® Transforms to AFP V2.1 for z/OS can be used to convert PostScript,PDF, and PCL 6 to bi-level IOCA. These transforms are invoked automatically. TIFF, JPEG, and GIFcolor objects are supported natively by the printer if the AFP Color Emulation feature is installed.

v In System i environments, the InfoPrint product for System i5 can be used to convert PostScript, PDF,PCL 6, TIFF, GIF, and JPEG to bi-level IOCA. These transforms are invoked automatically. TIFF, JPEG,and GIF color objects are supported natively by the printer if the AFP Color Emulation feature isinstalled.

v In an AIX® environment, InfoPrint Manager for AIX includes transforms to convert PostScript, PDF, PCL6, TIFF, GIF, and JPEG to bi-level IOCA. The optional SAP Print feature of InfoPrint Manager for AIXincludes a transform to convert SAP print data to AFP. These transforms are invoked automatically.TIFF, JPEG, and GIF color objects are supported natively by the printer if the AFP Color Emulationfeature is installed.

v In Windows environments, InfoPrint Manager for Windows includes transforms to convert PostScript,PDF, PCL 6, TIFF, GIF, and JPEG to bi-level IOCA. These transforms are invoked automatically. TIFF,JPEG, and GIF color objects are supported natively by the printer if the AFP Color Emulation feature isinstalled.

Note: While these PostScript transforms may be used to convert Embedded PostScript (EPS) objects,these objects are not intended to be printed standalone. They may lack the PostScript showpagecommand necessary for physical printing or the PostScript positioning commands necessary forcorrect orientation and printing on a physical page.


Printer ResolutionOutline fonts, which have been used in the past, are still used today. These fonts have no resolution, butare built in the printer to the printhead resolution. Because they provide resolution independence, outlinefonts should be used whenever possible. However, applications designed using custom raster fonts, orraster fonts for which no outlines are available, require these raster fonts for printing.

Images will have the best quality if printed at a printhead resolution equal to, or an even multiple of, theimage's native resolution. For example, when printing legacy 240-dpi images on a printer with a 240/300switchable printhead, use a printhead resolution of 240. When printing on a printer with a 480/600switchable printhead, use a printhead resolution of 480.

InfoPrint 4100 Models MS1, HS2, HS3, MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6, TS1, TS2, TS3, TD1/2, TD3/4, and TD5/6printers offer additional resolution options:

Table 3. Printer resolution options

Resolution Options

480 IPDS™ Resolution (dpi)240

Font Smoothing

v Enhanced Single Byte (Yes|No)

v Enhanced Double Byte (Yes|No)

600 IPDS Resolution (dpi)

v 240

v 300

v 600

v Automatic

Font Smoothing

v Enhanced Single Byte (Yes|No)

v Enhanced Double Byte (Yes|No)

With these additional resolution options, you need to plan operator procedures for selecting the correctoptions for your job mix.

480/600 Switchable Resolution

Selecting printhead resolutionPrinter Definition → PDL → IPDS

With a switchable printhead, you will need operator instructions on when and how to switch between thetwo different resolutions. If all your jobs are developed at a single dpi, for example 240 dpi, you may wantto keep the printer at 480 dpi resolution all the time.

However, if you have some jobs for 240 dpi and some for 600 dpi, you will need to have some way ofseparating the jobs by resolution and of notifying the operator when to change the resolution on theprinter. This change is done from the touch panel by selecting the Printer Definition tab and proceeding


through the definition steps. The printer normally takes less than a minute to complete this operation.Switching printer resolution involves switching the raster font libraries.

In 480 dpi resolution, the printer reports to PSF that it is a 240 dpi printer. It accepts 240 dpi raster fontsand automatically scales them to 480 dpi. From an operational and application standpoint, it is no differentthan a 240 dpi switchable printer.

Note that there are no 480 dpi raster fonts supplied by Ricoh, nor does the Ricoh recommend that youcreate or use 480 dpi raster fonts. You should use only 240 dpi raster fonts or outline fonts with 480 dpiprinthead resolution. 300 dpi raster fonts are best supported when printing in 600 dpi resolution.

With 480/600 switchable printheads, Ricoh recommends that jobs that use 240 dpi raster fonts be printedwith the 480 dpi printhead, rather than with the 600 dpi printhead. Because scaling 240 to 480 dpi is asimple matter of doubling the dots, both appearance and performance of 240 dpi jobs may be better at480 dpi resolution than at 600 dpi.

When the printer is in 600 dpi mode, you have a new capability: the option to specify IPDS Resolutionmode.

IPDS Resolution (600 dpi Only)

Selecting IPDS resolutionPrinter Definition → PDL → IPDS

With a 480/600 switchable printhead switched to 600 dpi resolution, the operator is able to select anintelligent printer data stream (IPDS) resolution. The choices are:

v 240 dpi

v 300 dpi

v 600 dpi

v Automatic

The operator selects an option from this screen. The printer reports the option selected to PSF.

240 dpi and 300 dpi IPDS Resolution ModeWhen the printer is set to 240 DPI® IPDS resolution mode, it reports to PSF that it is a 240 dpi printer.PSF can then send 240 dpi raster fonts to the printer without receiving an error. The printer automaticallyscales the 240 dpi raster fonts (and all other resources) to 600 dpi for printing. When the printer is set to300 dpi IPDS resolution mode, it reports to PSF that it is a 300 dpi printer. PSF can then send 300 dpifonts to the printer without receiving an error. Operational considerations for switching between 240 and300 dpi IPDS resolution modes are the same as those for switching between 480 and 600 dpi asdiscussed in “480/600 Switchable Resolution” on page 42.

However, unlike a 240/300 dpi switchable printer, the print resolution is actually 600 dpi. Applications usingoutline fonts can take full advantage of the 600 dpi resolution in either mode. The printer renders theoutlines at full 600 dpi resolution.

Note that when the printer has both a 480 dpi printhead and a 600 dpi printhead, it is generally preferableto print 240 dpi jobs using the 480 dpi. See “480/600 Switchable Resolution” on page 42.

600 dpi IPDS Resolution ModeWhen the printer is set to 600 dpi IPDS resolution mode, it reports to PSF that it is a 600 dpi printer. PSFdoes not send 240 or 300 dpi raster fonts to the printer. It sends outline fonts only. Although technically the


printer could accept 600 dpi raster fonts, Ricoh does not supply 600 dpi raster font and does notencourage you to use 600 dpi raster fonts. At 600 dpi, outline fonts are the recommended font technology.

Note that setting the printer to 600 dpi IPDS resolution mode does not provide any benefit over either 240or 300 dpi IPDS resolution mode. In all cases, the resolution at which the data is printed is 600 dpi. Also inall cases, outline fonts are accepted and rendered at 600 dpi. The only difference between a 600 dpiprinter set to 240 dpi IPDS resolution mode or to 600 dpi IPDS resolution mode is that when the printer isin 600 dpi IPDS resolution mode, it cannot receive and print 240 dpi raster fonts.

Automatic IPDS Resolution ModeThe final IPDS resolution mode is set to Automatic. When a 600 dpi printer is in Automatic IPDSresolution mode, the printer reports to PSF that it is capable of accepting any font resolution. This allowsPSF to send 240 dpi raster fonts, 300 dpi raster fonts, or outline fonts to the printer without requiring theoperator to change any printer configuration options on the touch panel. Jobs needing 240 dpi fonts canbe intermixed with those needing 300 dpi fonts.

Using automatic mode can simplify operating procedures for enterprises with jobs requiring resourceresolutions. However, with a 480/600 switchable printhead, you need to weigh this advantage againstpossible improvements in throughput and print clarity of 480 dpi for jobs formatted using 240 dpiresources. See “480/600 Switchable Resolution” on page 42.

Font Smoothing Mode (480 and 600 dpi Only)

Selecting font smoothingPrinter Definition → PDL → IPDS

Operators are able to select whether font smoothing is desired. The window presents two options:

v Single-byte Font Smoothing (Yes | No)

v Double-byte Font Smoothing (Yes | No)

The option appears when the operator selects 480 dpi IPDS printhead resolution or IPDS resolution for600 dpi printhead resolution. Specifying Yes causes the printer to initiate additional smoothing algorithmsfor 240 dpi and 300 dpi raster fonts when they are printed with the 480 or 600 dpi printhead. For mostcases, selecting Yes results in better print quality. However, because print aesthetics are subjective, thisenhancement can be turned off for either single-byte or double-byte fonts or both by specifying No.Specifying Yes to this option should have little or no impact on printer performance.

AFP Resource ResolutionRaster fonts are the only print objects or resources that are strictly resolution dependent.2 Other AFPresources are resolution independent. Form definitions and page definitions do not depend on printerresolution. Overlays and page segments that contain images and text formatting designed at a specificresolution are automatically adjusted by the printer to the correct resolution. However, this adjustmentsometimes causes formatting differences. Images and text for which exact positioning is important printbest at the resolution for which they were designed. For this reason, you may want to maintain separateresolution libraries of critical resources such as page segments and overlays that contain very preciseformatting or logos or signatures for which the highest quality print is required. The Multiple Resolutionsupport in PSF for z/OS provides the capability to automatically select from the correct resolution library.

2. Currently there is also a resolution dependence in certain GOCA objects that include image definition within GOCA.


Forms HandlingYou can load forms manually or with the automatic forms loading feature.

Automatic forms loading applies only to an individual printer. Autoload does not completely thread thewhole system but is used to load Printer 1 and Printer 2. The forms must be manually threaded throughthe buffer/flipper unit.

Splicing StationThe splicing station on the printer allows you to splice a new supply of forms to the trailing edge of theprevious supply of forms without having to re-load the forms through the printer.

Note: For Txx Models, available on Japan printers, and by feature code in other geographies.

Print AreaThe printer can print to the horizontal page perforations and within 12.7 mm (½ inch) of either vertical(tractor-hole) edge of the form. See Figure 28 on page 46.

Print quality may be degraded when printing near folding perforations, an internal perforation, or any cut inthe form. To ensure correct operation and print quality, maintain the following distances:

v From non-folding and internal perforations: 1.27 mm (0.05 in.)

v From folding perforations: for text, OCR, and bar codes: 8.5 mm (0.33 in.); for images and solid-area fill:12.7 mm (0.5 in.)

v From binder holes and cuts: 2.54 mm (0.1 in.).

Refer to the Forms Design Reference for Continuous Forms Advanced Function Printers and Chapter 6,“Selecting and Testing Forms,” on page 105 for more information.


Touch panelThe touch panel is the primary way the operator inputs information to the printer and receives status anderror messages from the printer in any of several different languages. Both the printer operator andCustomer Support Specialists use this touch panel.

The touch panel is used to set up and operate the printer. Some of the things you can do from the touchpanel are:

v Change printer definitions

v Change host system channel adapter definitions

v Change preprocessing/postprocessing device definitions

v Define form settings and create Snapshots

Power Control

Duplex ModelsA power control panel on the control unit on Printer 1 or on Printer 2 is used to select either remote orlocal power control for each printer in the configuration and the control unit independently.

Possible settings for Printer 1:

v When the Printer Power switch is set to Local, the printer is controlled by the printer Power On andPower Off If in Local switches on the same panel.

v When the Printer Power switch is set to Remote and the Control Unit Power switch is set to Local,the printer is controlled by the control unit Power On and Power Off If in Local switches on the Printer2 panel.

Horizontal PagePerforations

12.7 mm(0.5 in.)

12.7 mm(0.5 in.) R

4CI0

056

Vertical (tractor-hole)Edge

Do not use forms thathave printing between

the tractor holes

Figure 28. Printable page area


v When the Printer Power switch is set to Remote and the Control Unit Power switch is set to Remote,the printer is controlled by the control unit Power On and Power Off If in Local switch on the samepanel.

Possible settings for Printer 2:

v When the Printer Power switch is set to Local, the printer is controlled by the printer Power On andPower Off If in Local switches on the same panel.

v When the Printer Power switch set to Remote and the Control Unit Power switch is set to Local, theprinter is controlled by the control unit Power On and Power Off If in Local switches on the samepanel.

v The Control Unit Power switch on Printer 2 should not be set to Remote.

Each power control panel also contains a system Unit Emergency Power Off switch that drops power toall elements controlled by that panel.

Simplex ModelsThe power control panel on the control unit allows you to select either remote or local power control for theprinter and the control unit independently.

When either the printer or control unit Local/Remote switch is set to Local, you can control power for thatelement from the power control panel. When a Local/Remote switch is set to Remote for the printer, youcan control power for the printer using the Control Unit Power switch. The Control Unit Power switchshould not be set to Remote.

The power control panel also contains an Unit Emergency Power Off switch that drops power to allelements controlled by that panel.

Software Requirements

IPDS Print on Demand (POD)4100 printers in Duplex mode support switching between IPDS Print on Demand (POD) and IPDSProduction Print automatically. Print on Demand is automatically enabled by the printer in Duplex mode, orDual Simplex mode when using InfoPrint Manager. (Simplex models support only IPDS Production Print.)

Print on Demand works with an InfoPrint Manager for AIX server to cache one copy of a job in the printerand then print it multiple times. The job does not begin printing until the entire job is stored in the printer'smemory. Print on Demand can also be used to store a job in the printer that may otherwise not print atrated speed. When the printer definition in the InfoPrint Manager server is set to "Optimize for multiplecopies", it activates the job caching for any printer capable of Print on Demand.

See your marketing representative for more information about the hardware and software required for Printon Demand.

IPDS Production PrintIPDS mode—sometimes referred to as traditional or full IPDS mode—supports duplex printers in bothDuplex and Dual Simplex mode. IPDS mode requires one of the host licensed Print Services (PSF)products shown in Table 4 on page 48.

Each software environment has specific operating system and AFP program requirements. For a list of theprograms that are required for a particular environment, refer to the corresponding Print Services Facility(PSF) publications listed in Advanced Function Presentation: Printer Information, G544-3290. Also see“Advanced Function Presentation Licensed Programs” on page 72 for a listing of AFP software.


If the printer is connected to a Print-on-Demand (POD) server, the printer does not attempt to save pageson the printer. This may cause the printer to run slower when it is printing multiple copies of a documentthan it would in Print on Demand or when it is printing a document that would have been previously savedin Print on Demand.

Contact your marketing representative for details about ordering these configurations and features.

Table 4. Software support for the respective adapters and functions

AFPLicensedProgram

10/100/1000

EthernetTCP/IP

FICON®

ChannelESCON®

Channel

SelectMediumModifi-cation(SMM)

Basic/Enhanced

N-Up

Cut SheetEmulation

True TypeFonts

AFP ColorEmulation

PSF forOS/390® Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

PSF fori5/OS

Yes No No No Yes Yes No Yes

InfoPrintManagerfor AIX

Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

InfoPrintManagerforWindows®

Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Application EnvironmentThe printer supports the InfoPrint Advanced Function Presentation (AFP) licensed programs. Theseprograms let application developers take advantage of many special kinds of printing, including bar codeand optical character recognition (OCR) output.

The printer supports FOCA (Font Object Content Architecture), which allows printing with outline fonts.Outline fonts give you more choices of fonts with substantially less storage requirements.

The printer prints optical character recognition (OCR) characters and bar code applications and moststandard OCR fonts and bar code BCOCA (Bar Code Object Content Architecture) formats.

The printer processes advanced function printing functions. These functions use the Intelligent Printer DataStream (IPDS) to drive the printer. Refer to the InfoPrint Solutions Company Product Description, or theIntelligent Printer Data Stream Reference or more information. Also see “Advanced Function PresentationLicensed Programs” on page 72 for a listing of AFP software. Refer to Table 5 on page 49 for a listing ofprinter model choices as they relate to channel/adapter choices.

Host System Adapter ChoicesInfoPrint Models MS1, HS2, HS3, MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6, TS1, TS2, TS3, TD1/2, TD3/4, and TD5/6 comestandard with the Ethernet Copper 10/100/1000BaseT Ethernet.

InfoPrint 4100 printers can attach to the processing systems shown in Table 5 on page 49 with theindicated adapter choices.

InfoPrint 4100 printers can have a maximum of two adapters. These adapters may be intermixed in anycombination of two.


Table 5. Host processing systems and adapter choices for InfoPrint 4100

Host System Ethernet FICON Channel ESCON Channel

System z MS1, HS2, HS3,MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6,

TS1, TS2, TS3,TD1/2, TD3/4, TD5/6

MS1, HS2, HS3,MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6,

TS1, TS2, TS3,TD1/2, TD3/4, TD5/6

MS1, HS2, HS3,MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6,

TS1, TS2, TS3,TD1/2, TD3/4, TD5/6

System i HS2, HS3,HD3/4, HD5/6,

System p MS1, HS2, HS3,MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6,

TS1, TS2,TS3,TD1/2, TD3/4, TD5/6

System x MS1, HS2, HS3,MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6,

TS1, TS2, TS3,TD1/2, TD3/4, TD5/6

See Chapter 4, “Preparing the Processing Environment,” on page 61 for more information about systemand channel adapter requirements.

Gigabit Ethernet AdapterYou can attach the printer with Gigabit Ethernet (10/100/1000BaseT) to available host systems running:

v InfoPrint Manager for AIX

v InfoPrint Manager for Windows

v PSF for z/OS

v PSF for i5/OS

You can install one Gigabit Ethernet adapter and one of the following:

v A FICON channel adapter

v An ESCON channel adapter

System/390® Fiber Connection (FICON) Channel AdapterYou can attach to a FICON channel as follows:

v Directly to a host system FICON channel

v To the remote end of an IBM® 2032/2042 FICON Director

v To the remote end of an IBM 2029 Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexor (DWDM)

You can install one FICON channel adapter and one of the following:

v An Ethernet TCP/IP adapter

v An ESCON channel adapter

v A second FICON channel adapter

Enterprise Systems Connection (ESCON) Channel AdapterYou can attach to an ESCON channel as follows:

v Directly to a host system ESCON channel

v To the remote end of an IBM 9032/9033 ESCON Director

v To the remote end of an IBM 9036 ESCON Remote Channel Extender

You can install one ESCON channel adapter and one of the following:

v An Ethernet TCP/IP adapter


v A FICON channel adapter

v A second ESCON channel adapter

Adding a second ESCON adapter allows dynamic channel switching mode with tightly coupled channelsand/or processing units, or with Assign/Unassign (which can be used with one or two ESCON Adapters).

Preprocessing and Postprocessing Device InterfacesPreprocessing and Postprocessing Device Interfaces allow you to attach special equipment to helpautomate the handling of forms input or forms output (or both) to the printer. Preprocessing equipment ison the forms input side (for example, a roll feed) and postprocessing equipment is on the forms outputside (for example, a folder, burster, trimmer, or take-up roll).

Each of the printers has four interface ports. These ports may be equipped with Preprocessing/Postprocessing (Pre/Post) or Advanced Function Postprocessing (AF Post) interfaces.

v Preprocessing/Postprocessing (Pre/Post) – Attaches most types of preprocessing and postprocessingequipment, such as roll-feed equipment and folders, bursters, trimmers, or take-up rolls.

Pre/Post is standard.

v Advanced Function Postprocessing (AF Post) (Optional) – Attaches only postprocessing equipmentthat requires architected software and communications control. Only one AF Post interface can beinstalled on each printer.

IPDS supports the Select Medium Modifications (SMM) command which is used to invoke processingoptions through the Advanced Function Postprocessing interface. SMM support is not available on allPSF platforms. See “AFP Software Summary” on page 73 and Table 4 on page 48 for PSF supportdetails.

In duplex models, Port 1 in each printer has a Preprocessing/Postprocessing interface, which is standard.You may select optional Pre/Postprocessing or Advanced function postprocessing interfaces to equip Ports2, 3, and 4.

Note: The Forms Identification feature (FC 4464) uses a port in Printer 1 and could use an additional portin Printer 2 if you are printing in dual simplex mode.

Things to Remember About Pre/Postprocessing Equipment:

1. When using preprocessing equipment, be sure that adapter cables do not interfere with forms underthe printer. See “Space Requirements” on page 88 for cable placement.

2. When using 457-mm (18-inch) wide paper, the distance between the back edge of the paper and theback of the machine is about 0.6 cm (0.25 in.). This means that some of the powered-assist rollers(urge units) used with other InfoPrint printers may not work. Be sure to discuss this with your pre- orpostprocessor vendors.

3. Be sure that any preprocessing or postprocessing devices you order operate at the same resolution(dpi) as the printer.

4. With Duplex Configurations – To avoid static drag between the paper and the floor, Ricohrecommends that you install a conductive floor plate in front of each urge unit between the printerleveling pads. The floor plate is connected to the printer frame with a grounding strap. Normally,preprocessor vendors supply these plates. The plate should be approximately 61 cm x 152 cm x 0.71mm (2 ft x 5 ft x 0.028 in.).

Refer to “Defining Interfaces and Preprocessing or Postprocessing Devices” on page 149 for moreinformation concerning the Pre/Postprocessing interfaces.

Universal printer pre- and postprocessing interface (UP3I)The universal printer pre- and postprocessing interface (UP3I) is an industry standard intelligent LANinterface that connects production printers, inline pre- and postprocessing devices, workflow managers,


and remote operating stations. UP3I uses the industry standard IEEE 1394a "Firewire" connectivityarchitecture to provide high speed two way communications between the printer control unit and pre- andpostprocessing devices.

Universal Printer Pre- and Postprocessing Interface UP3IWith the UP3I feature enabled, you can check the status of your UP3I devices and enable or disable themfrom the printer console:

v Select Printer Definition → Pre/Postprocessing → UP3I Devices to display the Pre/Postprocessing -UP3I Devices panel. This displays a list of the UP3I devices that are currently communicating on theUP3I network. For each device you select, you can check the status and edit the device settings. Thedevice settings panel lets you change the device name, specify the distance between the printer andthe UP3I device, and select the default pre- and postprocessing operations.

v Select Printer Definition → Pre/Postprocessing→ Pre/Postprocessing to display thePre/Postprocessing - Pre/Postprocessing panel. Use this panel to edit the UP3I sequence and enable ordisable the sequence.

For additional information, refer to the Planning and Configuration Guide.

UP3I provides the following improvements:

v UP3I broadcasts information about values changed on the printer console to other UP3I devices. Theoperator needs to change the value only once. For example, the Forms Length today is set at theprinter and the operator must manually enter the same setting at each postprocessing device. Now theoperator only needs to make the change at the printer console and the change will take affect in eachpostprocessing device.

v UP3I reduces or eliminates setup errors by reducing the operator actions needed today to efficiently usea high-speed continuous forms printer with pre- and postprocessing devices.

v The printer can save postprocessing templates that contain settings for a given job. These settings canbe automatically sent to devices, rather than being manually setup by the operator.

v Today's pre- and postprocessing devices rely on printed marks and barcodes for control codes tooperate the devices. UP3I eliminates these marks by sending appropriate information over the LAN. Thiseliminates trimming to remove unacceptable marks on statements and books. It also eliminates difficultbarcode implementation by the customer.

v UP3I tracks pages through the whole system. With an extended jam recovery point, the printer can alsorequest pages that have been jammed at the postprocessing device.

v The customer can code finishing options and instructions in the formdef, requiring less operatorintervention and providing more options.

v Applications can specify the types of pre- and postprocessing required. Application information can beelectronically transmitted from the application program to the pre- or postprocessing device. Finishinginformation, such as saddle-stitch or edge-stitch, can be specified. This increases compatibility betweencontinuous forms printers and cut-sheet printers where application information can specify thepostprocessing options.

v UP3I improves operational efficiency by directing blank pages to a waste device rather than apostprocessing device.

System requirementsThe following items are required to fully implement UP³I:

The following printer models support UP³I:

v InfoPrint 4100 Model PS1/PD2 with Feature Code 4730

v InfoPrint 4100 Model HS1 and HS2 with Feature Code 4730

v InfoPrint 4100 Model HD2/HD4 with Feature Code 4730 or 4740, depending on the processor installed

v InfoPrint 4100 Models MS1/TS1 and MD2/TD2 with Feature Code 4740


v InfoPrint 4100 Models HS3 and HD6 with Feature Code 4730 or 4740, depending on the processorinstalled

v InfoPrint 4100 Models TS2, TS3, TD4, TD6 with Feature Code 4740

Ricoh ships the following items:

v Two UP3I interface card and an I/O drawer

v AFCCU microcode Version 12.0 or higher or InfoPrint Controller microcode Version 14.2 or higher

You need to order the following items from other vendors:

v IEEE 1394a switch boxes that meet the specifications of the 6-pin IEEE 1394a Firewire switcher

v Power supply for switch box

v IEEE 1394a Repeater cables that meet the specifications of the Firewire (i.Link) Extension Cable -6Pin-F / 6Pin-M 15 FT (built-in repeater) from A2Z Cables, Inc.

v IEEE 1394a cables that meet the specifications of the Firewire (i.Link) Cable - 6Pin-M /6Pin-M 15FTfrom A2Z Cables, Inc. - The specified cable length per segment (at 400 Mbit/s) is limited to a length of10 meters. If there is a longer distance between the UP3I device and the hub, an IEEE 1394a Repeaterdevice has to be inserted.

Make sure you use pre- and postprocessing devices that are UP3I capable.

Table 6. UP3I device configurations

PostPrinter 2 Printer 1

IEEE1394

15'Cable15'Cable 15'Repeater15'Repeater

Pre

IC3M

C29

6

Post

SwitchBox

SwitchBox

Post

Post

Printer 2 Printer 1

15' Cable

15' Cable

15' Cable 15' Cable 15' Cable15' Cable

Pre

PreIC

3MC

297

PPFA UP3I supportUP3I functionality must be written into your FORMDEF.

A UP3I finishing interface is being added to Page Printer Formatting Aid (PPFA). The function is supportedat the print file and document level by coding the keyword "UP3I" and its related parameters on the FormDefinition, and at the medium level, using "UP3I" and its parameters on the COPYGROUP command. Forspecific information, refer to the InfoPrint Page Printer Formatting Aid: User's Guide by accessinghttp://www infoprint.com and entering InfoPrint Page Printer Formatting Aid in the search field.


Conduit support for UP³iInfoPrint Manager and Print Services Facility (PSF) for OS/390 and z/OS provide conduit support for UP3I,meaning that you can submit jobs that have UP3I functionality written into the formdef through theseapplications.

For more information about the InfoPrint Manager go to http://www infoprint.com and search on InfoPrintManager for Windows or InfoPrint Manager for AIX.

For more information about the PSF for OS/390 and z/OS products go to http://www infoprint.com andsearch on Print Services Facility for OS/390

Reliability, Availability, and ServiceabilityThe printer is designed to ensure maximum reliability, availability, and serviceability. The followingelements reflect this:

v Message Display

The touch panel windows and the display on the printer operator panel display messages in thelanguage of your choice:

– U.S. English

– Spanish

– French

– German

– Japanese

– Italian

– Brazilian Portuguese

– Chinese Simplified

– Chinese Traditional

– Korean

– Russian

These messages give status information, request operator intervention, and guide operators throughprocedures that have more than one step. Help functions are available for most operations.

Note: Not all languages are supported on the printer operator panel.

v Error Log

Sensors and microcode detect faults in the printer. Information about faults is displayed to the operatorand logged on the control unit hard disk for use in correcting problems.

v Traces

The printer controller can perform several kinds of traces. It can record detailed information about theprinter and control unit activities and communications with the host system. The operator starts andstops traces.

v Print Samples

You can print these print samples whenever necessary to sample print quality, solve problems, adjustthe printer, or test the printer functions.

Data SecurityThe printer has the following data security features:

v The controlling computer cannot retrieve any data after sending it to the printer.

v After printing the last page, the printer cannot print any data that remains in the page buffer.

v The printer removes images that remain on the photoconductor.


v The control unit accepts commands from the controlling computer system to erase all residual print dataand fonts from its storage.

v Characters stored in the page buffer are difficult to interpret because the printer translates them from8-bit EBCDIC (extended binary-coded decimal interchange code) characters to another form.

If many of the printing applications for your company are confidential, consider placing the printer in acontrolled-access area. Then, by using special print classes, you can control when sensitive data isprinted.


Resident FontsThe printer supports the following contents of the InfoPrint Strategic Font Set:

v IBM Core Interchange Resident Scalable Font Set

v 4028 Compatibility Resident Font Set

v IBM Coordinated Resident Font Set

v DBCS Resident Raster Font Set

v DBCS Resident Scalable Outline Font Set

For more information on fonts, see Chapter 3 of the IPDS Handbook for Printers That Use the AdvancedFunction Common Control Unit, G544-3895.



Chapter 3. Organizing the Planning Team

Chapter OverviewThis chapter describes tasks for each planning team member and identifies additional resources towhich team members can refer. Because printer operators participate in the daily operation of theprinters, their duties are also in this chapter.

The first step in preparing to install the printer is to select a planning coordinator. This person isresponsible for organizing and managing a project team to plan, order, and install the printer and, ifnecessary, the Advanced Function Presentation (AFP) programs.

A typical planning team includes the following members:

v Planning coordinator

v Physical planner

v System programmer

v Application programmer

You may also want to include representatives from end-user areas as part of the planning team. Theirinput can be valuable in determining requirements for advanced printing functions and special-purposematerials.

Planning CoordinatorThroughout the planning phase, the planning coordinator meets with the planning team and yourinstallation planning representative to ensure that all pre-installation tasks are proceeding smoothly.“Implementation Plan” on page 59 is a checklist of these planning tasks.

The planning coordinator should read all the chapters in this publication to help the other team membersprepare for the printer. The planning coordinator should also be familiar with the other manuals in theInfoPrint 4100 Models Advanced Function Printers Library (see “InfoPrint 4100 Models MS1, HS2, HS3,MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6, TS1, TS2, TS3, TD1/2, TD3/4, and TD5/6 Advanced Function Printers Library” onpage viii).

In addition to the tasks described in this publication, the planning coordinator should consider relatedissues, such as:

v Training – Who needs to be trained on the printer or AFP? Who conducts the training sessions? Whenwill training be scheduled?

v Testing – Who performs the printer or AFP tests? What applications should we test? What forms shouldwe test? How can we conduct testing without affecting production schedules?

v Implementation – How will the printer be phased into production? What applications will use the printerfirst?

v Documentation – Which local procedures do we need to change? Who is responsible for changinglocal written procedures? Who needs copies of InfoPrint hardware and software manuals?

v Supplies – How large should the initial printer supply order be? What is the local procedure forensuring that supplies are kept in stock?

v Adapter Cables – Which adapter cables will be needed? Are they included on the printer order or willcustomer supply cables?

57

Physical PlannerThe physical planner is typically an industrial engineer or a supervisor. Physical planners determine thelocation for the printer and prepare a layout plan. They are responsible for ensuring that theenvironmental, electrical, and space requirements for the printer are met, and that the location isconvenient for printer operators and Customer Support Specialists.

Ricoh offers special assistance with physical planning. Contact your marketing representative forinformation.

Chapter 5, “Preparing the Physical Environment,” on page 77 is directed primarily toward physicalplanners. It includes a physical planning work sheet and a site-preparation checklist.

System and Application ProgrammersSystem and application programmers typically plan for and order the required Advanced Function Printinglicensed programs.

System programmers are responsible for:

v Ensuring that host channel cables, Ethernet, FICON, ESCON, and any channel extenders, converters,or switching boxes required in the host adapter configuration are available for installation.

v Ensuring that if SNMP is to be used, a TCP/IP (Ethernet) LAN feature code has been ordered as one ofthe adapters.

v Installing and testing the licensed programs.

v Incorporating the printer into the system configuration.

Information about system requirements for the printers is in Guide to Advanced Function Presentation,G544-3876, and Advanced Function Presentation: Printer Information, G544-3290.

Application programmers create and modify application programs that interact with the licensed programs.Application programmers participate in testing forms and applications. Chapter 6, “Selecting and TestingForms,” on page 105 and the Forms Design Reference for Continuous Forms Advanced Function Printerscontains information related to testing.

If you are a system or application programmer, read Chapter 4, “Preparing the Processing Environment,”on page 61 for information about planning for installing licensed programs, and Appendix B, “WorkSheets,” on page 173 for information about selecting printer options.

OperatorPrinter operators perform the following day-to-day tasks for the printer:

v Responding to the operational needs of the printer, such as loading forms and clearing forms jams.

v Replenishing the printer supplies, such as toner, developer mix, fuser oil, oiler belt, toner collector bottle,and fine filter.

v Performing routine cleaning.

v Checking print quality.

v Running traces.

v Splicing forms (if required).

The Operator's Guide, supplied in softcopy format with each printing system, contains general operatingprocedures, and is the primary reference book for printer operators. Printer operators should also read“Supplies” on page 165 for information about printer supplies.


The Quick Reference Guide, supplied with each printing system, contains the tasks an operator may needto run when the online help is not available.

Implementation PlanThis checklist contains many of the major tasks that must be performed before and during the printer'sinstallation. Use this checklist as a basis for developing your own detailed implementation project plan.

Fifteen Weeks Before DeliveryThe planning coordinator:

__ 1. Identifies the members of the planning team.

__ 2. Orders the printer.

Note: Ensure that the InfoPrint Multiple Printer Controller (MPC) and InfoPrint Manager softwareare also ordered.

__ 3. Orders the InfoPrint Advanced Function Presentation licensed programs.

__ 4. Orders any additional hardware that is required, such as the turnbar/flipper device.

__ 5. Verifies the order for the appropriate channel cables, TCP/IP, FICON, or ESCON, and for anyrequired channel extender, converter, or switching hardware boxes in the channel interface.Determines if customer will supply any of the adapter cables or devices.

__ 6. Prepares a plan for selecting and testing forms for use with the printer.

The physical planner:

__ 1. Determines the location for the printer and arranges for any changes to the site. Ensures that thesite will have conductive flooring.

__ 2. Identifies the delivery route for the printer.

__ 3. Prepares a space layout plan.

__ 4. Determines who will install the electrical wiring and outlets.

__ 5. Determines the type of electrical adapter and ground-fault circuit protection to be used.

The system programmer:

__ 1. Determines the Advanced Function Presentation licensed programs needed.

__ 2. Creates a conversion plan for line-printer data and electronic overlays.

The application programmer:

__ 1. Identifies the applications that must be changed for migration to the printer.

__ 2. Prepares a detailed plan for converting and testing applications that will be used with the printer.

Ten Weeks Before DeliveryThe planning coordinator:

v Meets with your installation planning representative to review the planning process.


v Schedules the installation of electrical wiring and outlets.


__ 1. Determines the administrative procedures for using Advanced Function Presentation licensedprograms.

__ 2. Begins installing and testing the Advanced Function Presentation licensed programs in thecomputer system.

Chapter 3. Organizing the Planning Team 59

Eight Weeks Before DeliveryThe planning coordinator:

v Orders initial supplies for the printer.


v Ensures that the electrical wiring and outlets are being installed on schedule.

Six Weeks Before DeliveryThe physical planner:

__ 1. Reviews site-preparation progress with your installation planning representative.

__ 2. Reminds the Customer Support Specialist to order the CE Toolkit and Maintenance Information.

Four Weeks Before DeliveryThe physical planner:

__ 1. Completes installing and testing of electrical wiring and outlets.

__ 2. Completes all site preparation.

__ 3. Verifies that a forklift will be available to unload the printers.

Note: Uncrate the printers at the installation site.

Arrival of the PrinterThe planning coordinator:

v Contacts the Customer Support Specialist and arranges to have the printer installed.


v Completes tests of the Advanced Function Presentation licensed programs, including the installationverification procedures supplied by Ricoh.


__ 1. Unpacks the printer and inspects it for external damage.

__ 2. Moves the printer to the prepared site.


Chapter 4. Preparing the Processing Environment

Chapter OverviewThis chapter contains specific information to help system programmers plan for integrating theprinters into the existing processing environment. The basic hardware, software, and applicationrequirements for the printer are described in “Host System Adapter Choices” on page 48 and“Application Environment” on page 48.

Network Adapters

InfoPrint 4100 Model MS1, HS2, HS3, MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6, TS1, TS2, TS3, TD1/2, TD3/4, and TD5/6printers support a variety of adapters in addition to the standard Gigabit Ethernet Copper TCP/IP support:

v 10/100/1000 BaseT Ethernet TX TCP/IP (copper)

v Gigabit Ethernet SX TCP/IP (fiber)

v FICON channel

v ESCON channel

See “Host System Adapter Choices” on page 48 for specifics on printers and host systems that supporteach of these adapters.

The InfoPrint 4100 printer controller includes a built-in Gigabit Ethernet adapter. Customers can addanother gigabit adapter feature (fiber or copper). Multiple adapters may be useful for the followingconfigurations:

v An isolated network or cross-over cable is used for connection between the printer and the print server(for example, MVS). Another Ethernet network connection is desired in order to access the printer formanagement or monitoring purposes, such as SNMP or Productivity Tracking Feature.

v The customer wants a fiber Ethernet connection to a fiber network infrastructure in addition to a copperconnection.

v Multiple Ethernet connections are desired for backup and redundancy reasons.

v Multiple Ethernet connections are desired for connection to multiple networks.

Customers can also add FICON and ESCON adapters. These adapters are often installed in the printercontroller at the factory before the printer is shipped to the customer site.

As you plan the type and transfer mode for your channel-adapter configuration, refer to the systemreference manual for your host system.

Verify with your planning coordinator that the desired adapter cables and any converter or extenderhardware boxes are ordered when the printer is ordered.

Notes:

1. Adapters must be physically installed and logically installed. “Physically installed” means installing theadapter in the printer. “Logically installed” means using the operator console to identify the adapter tothe printer. After an adapter is logically installed, a protocol (for example, IPDS) is installed andenabled and then the printer controller can accept jobs over the enabled protocol.

2. Channel adapters that are physically installed will be automatically logically installed.

3. Two adapters can be logically installed at the same time; however, they cannot both be Ethernetadapters.

4. For duplex systems operating in dual simplex mode, only one adapter is needed to connect the twosimplex engines to the system. Although the system consists of two printer engines, it is driven by asingle control unit. The two simplex engines require two contiguous addresses on an ESCON or

61

FICON adapter (beginning with an even-numbered address). When the printing system is operating induplex mode, the printers can use one of these addresses or a separate address on the samechannel.

5. When the printing system is printing in Dual Simplex mode, each printer engine can use a differentadapter to the same or different systems. For example, Printer 1 can be printing jobs from a z/OSsystem attached through an ESCON channel, while Printer 2 is printing jobs from an AIX systemattached through an Ethernet adapter.

6. A single Ethernet adapter is normally sufficient to provide access to the printer through a customer'snetwork. This includes all printer configurations, including Dual Simplex. However, multiple Ethernetadapters may be installed to meet varying customer requirements, such as those identified above.When multiple Ethernet adapters are installed, each adapter has a separate IP address. Adapters maybe connected to the same, or different networks.

7. You can enable both ESCON or FICON links at the same time at the printer and then print jobs fromdifferent hosts without interference. This is done by the automatically enforced vary on/off(ASSIGN/UNASSIGN) protection. See “Multiple Host Environment” on page 65 for details andprerequisites.

Gigabit Ethernet SX (fiber) TCP/IP Local Area NetworkThe Gigabit Ethernet SX feature is a TCP/IP adapter that offers high-speed data transfers usingmulti-mode optical fiber.

This feature is also known as 1000BASE-SX Ethernet.

The Gigabit Ethernet SX feature can be used to connect to a print server running PSF or InfoPrintManager software. The connection to the server can be direct (point-to-point) or through standard GigabitEthernet SX LAN connections.

The adapter complies with the IEEE 802.3z standard which is part of the IEEE 802.3 (2000) standard.

The Gigabit Ethernet SX adapter is a 1000BASE-SX PCI adapter that utilizes short-wave light and aduplex LC connector to connect to multi-mode optical fiber. When used with 62.5/125um multi-mode fiberthe maximum cable segment distance is 275 meters (with 200 MHz-km cable). When used with 50/125multi-mode fiber the maximum cable segment distance is 500 meters (with 400-500 MHz-km cable).

The Feature Code is 6472 or 6572. This feature provides a duplex LC fiber receptacle. See “Adapter cablefeatures” on page 66 for information about selecting a cable.

Gigabit Ethernet TX (copper) TCP/IP Local Area NetworkThe Gigabit Ethernet TX feature is a 10/100/1000BaseT adapter that uses an RJ-45 connector to connectto a Category 5 or 6 Ethernet cable. When used with standard Category 5 or Category 6 Ethernet cabling,the maximum cabling distance is 100 meters. This adapter is standard and can also be purchased as afeature code.

This feature is also known as 10/100/1000 BASE-T Ethernet or 1000BASE-T.

The Gigabit Ethernet TX feature can be used to connect to a print server running PSF or InfoPrintManager software. The connection to the server can be direct (point-to-point) or through standard GigabitEthernet TX (copper) LAN connections.

The adapter complies with the IEEE 802.3ab standard which is part of the 802.3 (2000) standard.

This adapter supports 10 Mb, 100Mb, and 1000Mb links to an Ethernet network.


The IEEE 802.3 (2000) standard specifies that Category 5 Ethernet facility wiring may be used with1000BASE-T if it meets certain new transmission parameter requirements.

The building cabling must conform to EIA-569 standard.

The Feature Code is 6482 or 6582. The connector type is RJ-45. See “Adapter cable features” on page 66for information about selecting a cable.

FICON Channel AdapterYou can attach to a FICON channel as follows:

v Directly to a host system FICON channel

v To the remote end of an IBM 2032/2042 FICON Director

v To the remote end of Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexor (DWDM)

Note: Longwave FICON adapter is not available on Txx models.

FICON adapters may run at 1 Gbps (1 000 000 000 bits per second) or 2 Gbps, depending on theequipment used.

For 1 Gbps adapter, the following guidelines apply:

v Longwave (LW) maximum link distance is 10 kilometers for 9/125 um single-mode (SM) fiber.

v Shortwave (SW) maximum link distance is 500 meters for 50/125 um multi-mode (MM) fiber.

v Shortwave (SW) maximum link distance is 175 meters for 62.5/125 um multi-mode (MM) fiber.

v Mode conditioning patch (MCP) cables may be used on each end of a multi-mode fiber to create aLongwave link with a maximum distance of 550 meters.

For 2 Gbps adapter, the following guidelines apply:

v Longwave (LW) maximum link distance is 10 kilometers for 9/125 um single-mode (SM) fiber.

v Shortwave (SW) maximum link distance is 300 meters for 50/125 um multi-mode (MM) fiber.

v Shortwave (SW) maximum link distance is 120 meters for 62.5/125 um multi-mode (MM) fiber.

v Mode conditioning patch (MCP) cables are not supported.

Set the host system missing-interrupt handler (MIH) timer for 15 minutes.

Chapter 4. Preparing the Processing Environment 63

Note:

v SM = Single Mode Fiber

v MM = Multi Mode Fiber

v LW = Long Wave Laser

v SW = Short Wave Laser

v um = micrometer or micron

v MCP = Mode Conditioning Patch Cable (1 Gbps only)

ESCON Channel Adapter

Note: Use Feature Code 6431 or 6531.

When connected directly to an ESCON channel, the printer can be a maximum distance of 3 kilometers(1.875 miles) from the channel. Either an IBM 9032 or 9033 ESCON Director provides connectivity toadditional host systems and also extends the maximum channel length as follows:

v Up to 6 kilometers (3.750 miles) with one 9032 or 9033 ESCON Director

v Up to 9 kilometers (5.625 miles) with two 9032 or 9033 ESCON Directors

(MM 62.5 or 50)SW LW

SW

HOSTSYSTEM

FICON

FICON

FICON

FICON

FICON

FICON

FICON

FICON

2032/2042

2032/2042

2032/2042

SW SW LWLW

LW LW LW LW LWLWFICON

DWDMFICON

FICON

(SM)100km-a -b c

NOTE: a+b+c 100km

FICON(MM 50)

(SM) 10km

(MM 50.0)

(MM 62.5)

(SM) 10km

(SM)

(MM 62.5 or 50.0)

(MM 62.5)

(SM) 10km

DWDM

(SM) 10km

(MM)

LW LW10km

LW MCP

MCP

MCP

MCP

MCP

MCP

LW

LW LW

SW

SW

LW

LW

SW

LW

FICON(MM 62.5)

SW SW

PRINTINGSYSTEM

HC

7I00

22

distancea

distancec

distanceb

(MM 50.0)

(MM 62.5)

SW

SW

SW

SWFICON

FICON

SW (MM 50)SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

SW

(MM 50)

(MM 62.5)

FICON

FICON

Figure 29. FICON channel adapter options


The Extended Distance Feature (XDF) on the 9032 or 9033 ESCON Director also extends the maximumchannel length as follows:

v Up to 23 kilometers (14.375 miles) with one Director

v Up to 43 kilometers (26.875 miles) with two Directors

The IBM 9036 ESCON Remote Channel Extender (Models 1 or 2) extends the interface across commoncarrier fiber optic connections. You can use one, two, or three 9036 extenders for a maximum distance of43 kilometers.

Figure 30 shows the details of the above connection options.

Note:

v CC = Common Carrier Fiber Optic Connection (SM)

v SM = Single Mode (Laser Driver - 20 km maximum distance)

v MM = Multi Mode (LED Driver - 3 km maximum distance)

Multiple Host EnvironmentWith ESCON or FICON, a single adapter can be shared between multiple LPARS or system images.However, the printer cannot be shared between multiple PSF hosts at the same time. Operationalprocedures must be put in place to take the printer offline to the existing PSF host before bringing it onlineto another PSF. Otherwise, unpredictable print results can occur.

The Multi-Host Environment configuration setting for the ESCON or FICON adapters insures that anoperator cannot inadvertently vary the printer online to multiple PSF hosts simultaneously. This allowssharing of ESCON adapters without concern that operator error could cause print problems. TheMulti-Host Environment setting for the adapter requires support for printer ASSIGN and UNASSIGN in both

XDF

XDF

XDF

XDF

9032/9033

9032/9033

XDF

23 km

43 km

HOSTSYSTEM

ESCON

ESCON

ESCON ESCON

ESCON

ESCON ESCON

9032/9033

9032/9033

9032/9033

9032/9033

ESCONESCONESCON

ESCON ESCON

26 km

43 km

43 km

XDF

XDF

ESCON

ESCON

9036MOD 1

CC 9036MOD 1

9036MOD 1

ESCON

9036MOD 1

ESCON9036MOD 2

CC

(SM)

(SM)

CCESCON

(MM)

(SM) (MM)

CC

(SM)

(MM) (SM) (MM)

(MM)(SM)(SM)

(SM)

(MM) (MM) (MM)

(MM)(MM)

(MM)

(MM)

9036MOD 1

9036MOD 2

(MM)

3 km

6 km

9 km

XDF

ESCON

(SM)

9036MOD 1

ESCON

(MM)23 km

PRINTINGSYSTEM

NW

TI0

01

3

Figure 30. Serial channel adapter options


the host operating system and PSF. Do not enable the Multi-Host Environment setting unless all hostsconnected to the printer support printer ASSIGN and UNASSIGN. Otherwise, PSF cannot access theprinter.

Support for the ASSIGN and UNASSIGN functions is built into the host and printer for communication withTCP/IP Ethernet.

To allow access by a different PSF host, the operator must drain the printer and vary it off to one hostbefore varying it on to the second host. A second host trying to vary on the printer is denied access with anotice that the printer is assigned elsewhere. The printer cannot be successfully varied on to the secondhost until the operator drains and varies it off to the first host. For more information on ASSIGN andUNASSIGN support, see PSF for z/OS customization information.

Adapter cable featuresEach installation requires custom planning for adapter cabling. Often the facility infrastructure dictates thetype of cable that will be used, the connectors that are available, and the length of cable that is required.Also, the network adapter feature being ordered will support a particular cable type and connector.

Jumper cables and converter kits are available as cable features. The jumper cables have a standardconnector on each end. The converter kits are short cables with a connector on one end and a receptacleon the other end. A standard connector will plug into a receptacle of the same type (for example LC to LC(R)).

One or more of the chargeable cable features may be ordered with the printer. There is a non-chargeablefeature code that may be selected when no cable will be ordered with the adapter (customer suppliedcable). In some cases the cable features shown will not meet the requirements of the installation andcables will have to be provided using an alternate method.

If the customer is supplying the cable, make sure the customer has the adapter feature information thatspecifies cable type and connector type (from Table 7.)

Selecting a cable featureTo select a cable feature:

1. Determine what connectors and cable types are supported on the adapter feature that is being ordered(see Table 7).

2. Determine what facility cabling (cable types and connector types) the customer will use. Table 11 onpage 70 shows a graphical representation of the cable connectors.

3. Select a cable feature code to match the adapter feature to the facility cabling (see Table 8 on page67).

4. If necessary, use Table 9 on page 68 to select a converter kit to convert a cable connector type to theadapter feature receptacle type.

5. Use the examples provided in Table 10 on page 68 to select the correct cable feature codes.

Table 7 shows the connector types and cable types supported for the adapter features. These are theadapter features that can be installed in the printer control unit.

Table 7. Cable and connector types supported by network adapter features

FeatureCode Feature Description (PCI adapter) Cable Type Supported

CableReceptacle

Standard 10/100/1000 BaseT Ethernet (onboard in controlunit)

Cat6 or Cat5e UTP (twisted pair) RJ-45 (R)


Table 7. Cable and connector types supported by network adapter features (continued)

FeatureCode Feature Description (PCI adapter) Cable Type Supported

CableReceptacle

6482 or6582

Gigabit Ethernet TX Adapter Feature(10/100/1000 BaseT Ethernet)

Cat6 or Cat5e UTP (twisted pair) RJ-45 (R)

6472 or6572

Gigabit Ethernet SX Adapter Feature 62.5 or 50 um MM fiber LC (R)

6431 or6531

ESCON Adapter Feature 62.5 or 50 um MM fiber MT-RJ (R)

6475 or6577

FICON LW Adapter Feature(Not available on Txx models)

9 um SM fiber LC (R)

6476 or6576

FICON SW Adapter Feature 62.5 or 50 um MM fiber LC (R)

(R) = receptacle (socket) type connectorMM = Multi-Mode fiberSM = Single-Mode fiberum = micrometer or micron

Table 8 shows Feature Codes for jumper cable. These optional cables are 31 meters (100 feet) in length.

Table 8. Feature Codes for jumper cables

FeatureCode Description Cable Type

Connector 1and 2 Length Common Usage

9777 No cable - Customer will supply (non-chargeable)

7501 Jumper Cable - fiber 9 um SM fiber LC 31 meters(100 feet)

FICON LW

7502 Jumper Cable - fiber 50 um MM fiber LC 31 meters(100 feet)

Gb Ethernet SXFICON SW

7503 Jumper Cable - fiber 62.5 um MMfiber

LC 31 meters(100 feet)


7504 Jumper Cable - fiber(order 7402 converter also)

62.5 um MMfiber

SC 31 meters(100 feet)


7505 Jumper Cable - fiber(ESCON: order 7401 converter)(others: order 7404 converter)

62.5 um MMfiber

ESCON 31 meters(100 feet)

ESCONGb Ethernet SXFICON SW

7506 Jumper Cable - fiber 62.5 um MMfiber

MT-RJ 31 meters(100 feet)

ESCON

7507 Jumper Cable - copper twisted pair Cat6 or Cat5eUTP

RJ-45 31 meters(100 feet)

Gb Ethernet TXEthernet

MM = Multi-Mode fiberSM = Single-Mode fiberum = micrometer or micron

Table 9 on page 68 shows cable converter kits for common connector types. Sometimes the availablecable connectors do not match the connectors provided on the adapter feature. The cable converter kitsmay be ordered with the adapter feature to convert the supplied connector to another common connectortype. These converter kits are commonly plugged onto the end of a longer cable to adapt the connectortype of the cable to the connector type of the adapter feature. These optional converter kits are all 2meters (6 feet) in length.


Table 9. Cable converter kits

FeatureCode Description Cable Type

Connector 1Type (plugsinto adapter)

Receptacle(R) Typeplugs intocable) Length Common Usage

7401 Converter kit (fiber) 62.5 um MMfiber

MT-RJ ESCON (R)(old ESCON)

2 meters (6 feet) ESCON

7402 Converter kit (fiber) 62.5 um MMfiber

LC SC (R) 2 meters (6 feet) Gb Ethernet SXFICON SW

7403 Converter kit(fiber) 50 um MMfiber

LC SC (R) 2 meters (6 feet) Gb Ethernet SXFICON SW

7404 Converter kit(fiber) 62.5 um MMfiber

LC ESCON (R) 2 meters (6 feet) Gb Ethernet SXFICON SW

7405 Converter kit(fiber) 9 um SMfiber

LC SC (R) 2 meters (6 feet) FICON LW

R = receptacle (socket connector)MM = Multi-Mode fiberSM = Single-Mode fiberum = micrometer or micron

For example, if you have ESCON (FC 9970/4131) installed and are replacing it with ESCON (FC 6431),the table shows that the original ESCON (FC 9970/4131) uses an ESCON (R) cable receptacle. Table 7on page 66 shows that the new ESCON Adapter Feature (FC 6431) uses an MT-RJ (R) cable receptacle.Therefore, select cable converter cable kit 7401 (MT-RJ to ESCON (R) (from Table 9) to use with theexisting cabling and the new ESCON Adapter Feature.

Table 10 shows examples of the feature codes for common cable types. Use this table to order the correctcable feature codes when your facility has one type of cable connector and the printer has a different typeof cable connector. Table 11 on page 70 shows a graphical representation of the cable connectors.

For example, to order a 62.5 um MM cable that requires an LC connector at one end and an LC connectorat the other end and is 31 meters (100 feet) long, order Feature Code 7503. This cable could be usedbetween an adapter that has an LC (R) receptacle and facility cabling with an LC (R) receptacle.

To order a 62.5 um MM cable that requires an LC connector at one end and an SC connector at the otherend and is a total of 33 meters (106 feet) long, order Feature Codes 7402 and 7504. This cable could beused between an adapter that has an LC (R) receptacle and facility cabling with an SC (R) receptacle.

To order a 62.5 um MM cable that requires an LC connector at one end and an ESCON connector at theother end and is a total of 33 meters (106 feet) long, order Feature Codes 7404 and 7505. This cablecould be used between an adapter that has an LC (R) receptacle and facility cabling with an ESCON (R)receptacle.

Table 10. Example Feature Codes for Common Cables

Adapter Type

CableReceptacleat Printer Cable Type Cable Length

Cable FeatureCodes Needed

CableReceptacle atFacility

Gb Ethernet TX RJ-45 Ethernet Cat5e orCat6 twisted pair

31 meters (100 feet) 7505 RJ-45

10/100 Ethernet RJ-45 Ethernet Cat5e orCat6 twisted pair

31 meters (100 feet) 7505 RJ-45


Table 10. Example Feature Codes for Common Cables (continued)

Adapter Type

CableReceptacleat Printer Cable Type Cable Length

Cable FeatureCodes Needed

CableReceptacle atFacility

ESCON MT-RJ 62.5 um fiber 31 meters (100 feet) 7506 MT-RJ

ESCON MT-RJ 62.5 um fiber 2 meters (6 feet)31 meters (100 feet)

74017505

ESCON

ESCON MT-RJ 62.5 um fiber 2 meters (6 feet) 7401 ESCON (R)

Gb Ethernet SX LC 62.5 um MM fibercable

31 meters (100 feet) 7503 LC


2 meters (6 feet)31 meters (100 feet)

74027504

SC



74047505

ESCON


2 meters (6 feet) 7402 SC (R)


2 meters (6 feet) 7404 ESCON (R)

Gb Ethernet SX LC 50 um MM fiber cable 31 meters (100 feet) 7502 LC

Gb Ethernet SX LC 50 um MM fiber cable 2 meters (6 feet) 7403 SC (R)

FICON SW LC 62.5 um MM fibercable

31 meters (100 feet) 7503 LC



74027504

SC



74047505

ESCON


2 meters (6 feet) 7402 SC (R)


2 meters (6 feet) 7404 ESCON (R)

FICON SW LC 50 um MM fiber cable 31 meters (100 feet) 7502 LC

FICON SW LC 50 um MM fiber cable 2 meters (6 feet) 7403 SC (R)

FICON LW* LC 9 um SM fiber cable 31 meters (100 feet) 7501 LC

FICON LW* LC 9 um SM fiber cable 2 meters (6 feet) 7405 SC (R)

No cables needed. This Feature Codeindicates customerwill supply cable.

9777

R = receptacle (socket) type connectorMM = Multi-Mode fiberSM = Single-Mode fiberum = micrometer or micron* = Not available on Txx models


Table 11. Cable connectors and receptacles

LC

av2u

0038

SC

av2u

0034

SC (R)

av2u

0037

RJ-45

av2u

0039

MT-RJ

av2u

0040

ESCON

av2u

0036

ESCON (R)

av2u

0035


Performance ConsiderationsThis section contains questions for system programmers to answer when planning for the channel-adapterconfiguration and for Advanced Function Presentation licensed programs.

v How much and what kind of data will be printed?

A printed page can consist of different types of text, images, overlays, and fonts. The combination ofinformation on the page determines the time needed to prepare the data for printing. Jobs with little textand no image or graphics are processed faster than jobs with complex pages that may include scalingand image decompression.

v Will multiple pages of data be printed per sheet?

If an application uses N-Up Page Positioning or Cut Sheet Emulation (CSE), you will be increasing thenumber of pages printed per minute. For example, for a printer with a maximum throughput of 465simplex 8.5 in. forms per minute, changing the application to print 2-Up 11 in. forms increases themaximum throughput to 720 simplex pages per minute. If the application is duplex, the maximumthroughput is doubled to 1440 pages per minute.

Increasing the throughput increases the amount of data per minute being transferred to and processedby the system and the printer. System and channel loads may need to be reevaluated and adjusted toallow for the increased processing and transfer requirements. Increasing the number of pages perminute also intensifies processing based on page count, such as Checkpointing. Consider increasingthe Check Point interval for applications using N-Up, CSE, or duplexing.

v How busy is the system?

Several things affect the performance of the system and directly affect communication with the printer:

– Speed of the computer system

– Amount of available storage

– Importance of tasks assigned in the system

– Control program used to drive the printer

v Can the adapter support the data rate required for this application?

Slower technologies are not recommended for applications that are data intensive and require a highbandwidth. Newer technologies such as FICON channel or Gigabit Ethernet provide excellent bandwidthand room for future growth in print data.

Plan your system so that it can adjust to the change and growth of your company.

SNMP Remote AccessPrinters that are connected to a LAN may be accessed by SNMP. The InfoPrint Network Printer Manageris a free application that runs on Windows. It may be downloaded by accessing http://www.infoprintsolutionscompany.com and searching on Infoprint Network Printer Manager. Thisapplication uses the SNMP interface to obtain configuration and status information about the printer.

All or part of the following Management Information Bases (MIBs) are supported by the InfoPrint 4100Controller. The ASN.1 documents identified in the tables below are on the InfoPrint 4100 User InformationCD and on the Ricoh web site (www.infoprint.com). These may be used in conjunction with a MIB browser,or by customer written applications.

Table 12. MIB variables supported by the InfoPrint 4100 controller

MIB Description ASN.1 Document Comments

Printer MIB(RFC 3805)

Printer-MIB.txt

Host Resources MIB(RFC 2790)

HOST-RESOURCES-MIB.txt


Table 12. MIB variables supported by the InfoPrint 4100 controller (continued)

MIB Description ASN.1 Document Comments

MIB-2(RFC 1213)

RFC1213-MIB.txt Supported Groups:

v system

v interfaces

v at (address translation)

v ip

v icmp

v tcp

v udp

v snmp

Unsupported Groups

v egp (extended gateway protocol)

v transmission

The following ASN.1 documents are imported by one or more of the supported MIB documents listed inthe previous table and are useful for compiling the MIBs into a MIB browser. These documents containStructure of Management Information (SMI) definitions, Object Identifiers, textual conventions that arereferenced by the ASN.1 documents. Some of these documents contain additional MIB variable definitions.Their inclusion does not imply that they are supported by the InfoPrint 4100 controller. The MIB variablessupported by the InfoPrint 4100 controller are as documented in Table 12 on page 71.

Table 13. ASN.1 documents

Reference ASN.1 Document

IANA IANA-PRINTER-MIB.txt

IANA IANA-CHARSET-MIB.txt

IANA IANAifType-MIB.txt

RFC 2790 HOST-RESOURCES-TYPES.txt

RCF 2863 IF-MIB.txt (see note)

RCF 3418 SNMPv2-MIB.txt (see note)

RCF 2578 SNMPv2-SMI.txt

RCF 2579 SNMPv2-TC.txt

Note: These documents contain MIB variable definitions that are not supported by the InfoPrint 4100 controller, butthey also contain declarations that are needed to compile the other ASN.1 documents.

Advanced Function Presentation Licensed ProgramsSome Advanced Function Presentation (AFP) licensed programs are required for operating the printer;others are optional.

The planning team should work with the end-user community to determine which optional advancedfunctions are needed. Using the Guide to Advanced Function Presentation may be helpful during thisprocess. That publication contains a summary of Advanced Function Presentation , its concepts, products,and benefits. It contains an introduction to Advanced Function Presentation and describes how thelicensed programs can meet your specific needs.


InfoPrint Advanced Function Presentation SoftwareDetermining the printing needs of your company and selecting the software that best meets these needsare important steps in improving your printing operations. Refer to Guide To Advanced FunctionPresentation G544-3876, for a description of available AFP software.

You need to order Print Services Facility (PSF) licensed programs for the operating system of each host towhich your printer will be attached. “AFP Software Summary” lists the PSF licensed programs that Ricohrequires for use with its Advanced Function Printers.

Contact your marketing representative for the minimum PSF levels and prerequisites and limitations thatapply for supporting the printer.

AFP Software Summary

v PSF for System i5: 5763-SS1, 5769-SS1

v InfoPrint Manager for AIX: 5765-F68 (Version 4 Rel. 2), 5648-F35 (Version 4 Rel. 3)

v InfoPrint Manager for Windows XP and Windows 2000: 5639-N49 (Version 2 Rel. 2), 5648-F36(Version 2 Rel. 3)

v PSF for z/OS: 5655-B17

InfoPrint Manager can be used along with the SNMP support in the printer to monitor the status of theprinter remotely. SNMP support in the printer also gives faster effect at the printer when it is purging pagesfor the InfoPrint Manager “Forward Space and Backward Space” function.

Optical Character Recognition and Bar Code ApplicationsYou can use the printer for optical character recognition (OCR) and bar code applications.

Because of variations in OCR readers and bar-code scanners, be sure that you test the printer OCR andbar code output with the actual readers and scanners that you use in your processing environment.“Testing Forms and Applications” on page 106 has more information related to testing OCR and bar codeoutput.

For more information about OCR and bar-code printing, refer to:

v Forms Design Reference for Continuous Forms Advanced Function Printers

v About Type: InfoPrint Solutions Company's Technical Reference for 240-Pel Digitized Type

v Bar Code Object Content Architecture Reference

See your marketing representative to obtain these publications.

All of the printers support OCR-A and OCR-B fonts.

InfoPrint supports three methods for processing bar codes:

v Bar Code Object Content Architecture (BCOCA), which is Ricoh's strategic method

v Document Composition Facility (Program 5748-xx9)

v Bar Codes and Optical Character Recognition Fonts (Program 5688-021)

BCOCA SupportAll of the PSFs process BCOCA objects once the objects are generated. InfoPrint supplies the followingBCOCA generators:

v Advanced Function Printing Utilities/400 (57xxAF1)

v OS/400 Data Description Specification (DDS)

v Page Printer Formatting Aid (PPFA) (5688–190)

v Advanced Print Utility for AS/400


v Advanced Function Printing Toolbox

Other platforms require non-InfoPrint generators to produce BCOCA objects.


BCOCA supports the following bar code types:

Table 14. Bar-code type and modifier combinations

Bar Code Type Modifier

X'01': 3-of-9 Code X'01' and X'02'

X'02': MSI X'01' through X'09'

X'03': UPC/CGPC, Version A X'00'

X'05': UPC/CGPC, Version E X'00'

X'06': UPC, 2-Character Supplemental X'00'

X'07': UPC, 5-Character Supplemental X'00'

X'08': EAN 8 (includes JAN short) X'00'

X'09': EAN 13 (includes JAN standard) X'00'

X'0A': 2-of-5 Industrial X'01' and X'02'

X'0B': 2-of-5 Matrix X'01' and X'02'

X'0C': Interleaved 2-of-5 X'01' and X'02'

X'0D': Codabar X'01' and X'02'

X'11': Code 128 X'02'

X'16': EAN, 2 Digit Add-on X'00'


X'18': Postnet X'00' through X'03'

X'1A': RM4SCC X'00'

X'1B': Japan Postal Bar Code X'00' and X'01'

X'1C': Data Matrix 2D Bar Code X'00'

X'1D': MaxiCode 2D Bar Code X'00'

X'1E': PDF 417 2D Bar Code X'00' and X'01'

X'1F': Australian Post Bar Code X'00' through X'08'

X'20': QR Code 2D Bar Code X'02'

X'21': Code 93 X'00'

X'22': USPS Four-State X'00' through X'03'

X'86': UPC, 2-Character Supplemental X'01' and X'02'

X'87': UPC, 5-Character Supplemental X'01' and X'02'

X'91': Code 128 X'03'

X'92': Code 128 (new HRI formatting) X'04'



X'98': PLANET X'04'

X'9A': Dutch KIX X'01'


Page Printer Formatting Aid (Program 5688-190)v Codabar

v Code 3 of 9

v Industrial 2 of 5

v Matrix 2 of 5

v Interleaved 2 of 5

v MSI

v European article numbers (EAN) 8 and 13, which include Japanese article number (JAN) Short andStandard

v Universal product codes (UPC) A and E, which include Canadian grocery product code (CGPC)

Installing and Verifying

The system programmer installs and verifies the AFP programs before the printer is installed. Licensedprograms include test procedures to ensure that the software is installed correctly.

At installation, the application programmer creates the resources (form definitions, page definitions,electronic overlays, and page segments) that will be in the resource libraries.

ConversionWith the availability of Advanced Function Presentation, you may want to review your general approach toprinted output to get maximum benefit from the new functions. Your application development staff maywant to begin planning for this conversion effort before the printer is installed. Typical tasks to considerinclude:

v Changing font character sets

v Converting line-printer applications to page-printer applications

v Converting preprinted forms to electronic overlays

v Creating new applications by using electronic overlays

v Enhancing existing applications to take advantage of printer functions

v Investigating applications that have special programming requirements


Chapter 5. Preparing the Physical Environment

Chapter OverviewThis chapter describes the environmental, power, physical, and space requirements that arenecessary before you install the printers. Refer to Appendix B, “Work Sheets,” on page 173 for aninstallation-planning work sheet and a physical-planning work sheet. The audience for this chapter isthe physical planner and the system programmer.

Environmental RequirementsConsider the following requirements as you select the location for your printer:

v Temperature and humidity

Extremes of temperature and relative humidity can affect forms and adversely affect machineperformance. These effects may include forms jams and unacceptable print quality. For optimalperformance, operate the printer within the following ranges of temperature and humidity and within theparameters specified in Table 15:

– Temperature: 18 – 24° C (65–75°F)

– Relative Humidity: 40% – 60%

Table 15. Operating Environment Power On

Operating Environment - Power On

Dry Bulb Temperature Relative Humidity

15.6° C (60°F) 20% - 80%

18.0° C (65°F) 20% - 80%

21.1° C (70°F) 20% - 65%

23.9° C (75°F) 20% - 50%

26.7° C (80°F) 20% - 35%

v Ventilation

Dust and other contamination can cause machine faults. It is not recommended to place the printer inclose proximity to storage devices, such as tape drives and disk drives. The printer operates best in anair-conditioned computer room with year-round humidity control and predominately recirculated, filtered air.Refer to the General Information Manual: Installation Manual—Physical Planning for details aboutventilation requirements for other equipment.

To maintain the ambient temperature within the above temperature range for optimal performance, theremust be an adequate supply of cooling air and outdoor make-up air for each print engine in the printerroom.

Cooling air:3600 m3/hr

Outside make-up air:A minimum 10% of the cooling air must be outside make-up air.

Additional ventilation may be required depending on paper selection and environmental conditions. Referto Forms Design Reference for Continuous Forms Advanced Function Printers for more information aboutselecting preprinted forms and using them safely.

77

Normal Precautions to Prevent FireBecause the forms and toner used in the printer can burn, take precautions to prevent fire. Theseprecautions include commonsense measures, such as keeping potentially combustible materials (forexample, curtains and chemicals) away from the printer, and providing adequate ventilation and cooling.

Vacuum CleanerEnsure that the vacuum cleaner used to clean the printer meets the following requirements:

v All attachments or tools that are connected to the vacuum cleaner through which paper dust, toner, ordeveloper mix pass are nonconductive.

v Vacuum-cleaner motor cooling must be separate from the vacuum line so that these same substancesdo not contact the electrical brushes of the vacuum-cleaner motor. Filtering the vacuum line andallowing the filtered air to cool the motor is not safe.

Physical RequirementsConsider the electrical requirements for the printer when selecting its location.

Power RequirementsThe following sections specify power requirements for the print engines, the printer control unit, and the AirBearing Buffer/Flipper Unit (if installed).

Power Outlet and Cable SummaryYou should plan for one or more outlets, as summarized below.

v Print engine (one outlet for simplex and two outlets for duplex).

v Printer control unit (one outlet for simplex and two outlets for duplex).

v Air Bearing Flipper Unit (one outlet if the Air Bearing Buffer/Flipper Unit is installed).

v Air Supply Unit for turnbars and cooling tower -‘L’ or ‘H’ configuration (one outlet if air supply unit isused)

Plan for cable lengths when doing your space planning. Figure 31 shows cable lengths for the print enginepower cable and the printer control unit power cable.

Print engine power cable4.2 m (14 feet) Printer control unit power cable

2.8 m (9.2 feet)

Signal/communicationCable access

av2u

0041

Front

Top View

Rear

Figure 31. Power cable lengths for engine and printer control unit


Print Engine Power Cable and Receptacle

All Countries Except the U.S.A. and Canada (All Models): The print engine power cable is suppliedwithout a plug. Provide the appropriate plug and compatible receptacle.

Understand the electrical standards for your country, and use only an approved plug. Your marketingrepresentative has information on the voltage requirements in your country.

U.S.A. and Canada (Models MS1, HS2, MD1/2, HD3/4, TS1, and TD1/2): InfoPrint 4100 Models MS1,HS2, MD1/2, HD3/4, TS1, and TD1/2 use cords with Hubbell plugs. Provide either of the following Hubbellconnector or receptacle (or equivalent) for this plug:

HBL460C9V05 Connector (inline)

HBL460R9V0 Receptacle (mounts on a wall or rail)

Figure 32 shows a Hubbell cord, plug, and receptacle.

Positions for phase connectors R1, S2, T3, and ground (G) are shown. An angle back box may be used inconjunction with the receptacle.

Note: These parts are available through Hubbell even though the part numbers shown may not be astandard item listed in their catalog.

S2

T3

R1

A23

I003

0

G

Figure 32. Hubbell plug and receptacle

Chapter 5. Preparing the Physical Environment 79

U.S.A. and Canada (Models HS3, HD5/6, TS2, TS3, TD3/4, and TD5/6): InfoPrint 4100 Models HS3,HD5/6, TS2, TS3, TD3/4, and TD5/6 use cords with Russellstoll plugs. Provide either of the followingRussellstoll connector or receptacle (or equivalent) for this plug:

RS4100C9W Connector (inline)

RS4100R9W Receptacle (mounts on a wall or rail)

Note: These parts are available through Russellstoll or their distributors.

Figure 33 shows a Russellstoll cord, plug, and receptacle.

Positions for phase connectors R1, S2, T3, and ground (G) are shown. An angle back box may be used inconjunction with the receptacle.

For more information about voltage requirements refer to“Common Electrical Requirements” on page 83.

S2

T3

R1

A23

I003

0

G

Figure 33. Russellstoll plug and receptacle


Physical installation Power and Grounding Recommendations

Note: Consult electrical authorities to ensure compliance with local electrical code.

Power recommendations: De-rate facility step-down transformers 50% to handle surge currents andharmonic currents. Assume that the transformer's neutral connection (400V installations) will see two times(2X) the current of any of the phases.

The transformer neutral connection is bonded to earth. Ensure that (1) the connection between earth andtransformer is secure, (2) that the grounding rods are in good condition and in good contact with earth,and (3) that the connection distance is the shortest path possible.

To minimize interference between devices in the printing room, separate step-down transformers may beused to feed separate groups of equipment. However, this is not always feasible. To reduce interference,install the transformers as close as possible to the distribution panel and, from the panel, feed everydevice with its own separate power cord (L1, L2, L3, (N,) E). This will ensure the shortest length ofcommon (shared) wiring.

The power cord neutral wire must be at least as large as the line (phase) wires.

To best balance the loading on the phases of the transformer when more than one printer engine isinstalled, the line (phase) wires (but not neutral wire) to the printers may be rotated. See Figure 34.

If more than one printer is installed, the power line wires may be rotated to balance the transformer phaseloading. In high voltage regions (400V), a neutral wire is present, but is not rotated.

Printer 1 Printer 2 Printer 3 Printer 4

To Breaker Panel and Transformer

TB101

1 2 3

R S T

N

TB101

1 2 3

R ST

N

TB101

1 2 3

RS T

N

TB101

1 2 3

R S T

N

av1u

0038

Figure 34. Breaker panel to printer wiring.


Grounding recommendations:

v Good grounding (earthing) is essential for reliable operation of electronic printers.

v Ensure that neutral is securely bonded to ground at the feeding transformer.

v Neutral must always be separate from ground except at the transformer (TNS).

v Each distribution panel should have a dedicated ground feed from the transformer's earth connection.

v The printer power cord must contain a dedicated ground wire. Using conduit for grounding of electronicdevices is not sufficient and is not reliable.

v To ensure all equipment operates from an equal potential ground, the facility may utilize a groundingring around the periphery and/or a grounding grid under the floor or building.

v To maintain good grounding at high frequencies, it is recommended that ground be accessible close tothe printers. This might be in the form of rods driven into the earth directly under the printer room floor,or the building's steel structure which should be in good contact with the earth. The service technicianwill connect a wire from this local ground to the frame of the printer.

v Since the pre- and post-processing equipment works integrally with the printer, it is recommended thatthe frame of each pre/post device be wired to the frame of the printer. The Customer Support Specialistwill perform this wiring.

Auxiliary power source recommendations: The InfoPrint printers are designed to tolerate loss ofpower without damage. Therefore, backup power sources such as UPS units or other electronic powersupplies are not necessary.

The dynamic power consumption of laser printers must be understood if a backup power source is beingconsidered.

1. Startup power, and current, might exceed five times (5X) the continuous, or average, power. This ishighly dependent on the impedance of the facility's distribution system and power source. This surge ofpower lasts only a few cycles of AC and rapidly falls to its nominal level.

2. While printing, there are regular changes in current loading as lamps and heaters cycle on and off, andthis intermittent, instantaneous power might exceed two times (2X) the average power.

3. The continuous, or average, power is specified in the following sections.

Therefore, the selection of an auxiliary power source must involve careful consideration of these aspectsof power consumption, and it is recommended that the manufacturer of such equipment understand thesepower requirements.

Additional electrical requirements for 50Hz 400 V installations:

Note: The following statements apply to InfoPrint 4100 models MS1, MD1/2, HS2, HD3/4, HS3, HD5/6,TS1, TD1/2, TS2, TD3/4, TS3, and TD5/6.

In addition to the electrical requirements defined in Table 16 on page 83, Table 21 on page 85, andTable 24 on page 86, the following are minimum requirements for service current capacity and short circuitratio:

Service current capacity (Iscc)75 amps minimum for duplex models50 amps minimum for simplex models

Short circuit ratio (Rsce)150 minimum

Note: Refer to “Glossary” on page 243 for definitions of these terms.


Interface point Requirements for low frequency phenomena: EN 61000-3-11 ComplianceStatement: This equipment complies with EN 61000-3-11 provided that Zmax is less than or equal to 0.05ohms at the interface point between the user's supply and the public network. It is the user's responsibilityto ensure the equipment is connected only to a supply of that impedance or less. The user may consultwith the electrical utility, if necessary, to determine the network impedance.

Common Electrical RequirementsEnsure that you have electrical outlets that meet the power requirements for your printer. These outletsmust be able to disconnect power from each printer. For example:

v Compatible plugs and receptacles installed near each printer. See Table 18 on page 84, Table 21 onpage 85, or Table 24 on page 86 (depending on the model of the printer) for more information.

v A circuit breaker that breaks all live poles for each printer. This circuit breaker must be dedicated to theprinter and be within easy reach.

Table 16. Basic voltage requirements for the printer

AC Voltages Wiring Information

Nominal Minimum Maximum Printer Engine Control UnitFlipper (duplex

models)

U.S.A,Canada

60Hz

208220230240

187198207216

229242252264

3L + PE 2L + PE 2L + PE

Japan50 or 60Hz 200 180 220

3L + PE 2L + PE 2L + PE

Europe50Hz

380400415

342360374

418440456

3L + N + PE L + N + PE L + N + PE

Attention: The 50-Hz 380/400/415 Volt version does not support non-earthed neutral and impedance-groundedneutral power distribution systems. Installation on an impedance-grounded neutral power system (IT Power System)could result in failures of motors and transformers in the printer.

Note: The current load for InfoPrint 4100 Models HS3, HD5/6, TS2, TS3, TD3/4. and TD5/6 is greaterthan previous InfoPrint 4100 Models, consistent with their higher throughput. Installation of thisprinter might require that you increase your branch circuit service rating. Consult your localelectrical authority to ensure your service is sufficient.

Environmental ImpactConsider the power requirements and heat and sound generated by the printer when selecting its location.The following sections provide load, heat dissipation, and acoustical information for each InfoPrint 4100printer model.


Heat Dissipation, Power, and Acoustics (Models MS1, MD1/2, TS1, andTD1/2)Table 17. Heat dissipation and load for InfoPrint 4100 models MS1, MD1/2, TS1, and TD1/2

Engine (per Engine)MS1,MD2,

TS1, orTD2

ControlUnit

MD1 orTD1

ControlUnit

OptionalAir

BearingFlipperSleep Mode Idle Ready Mode

Printing (20 lbpaper)

50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 or 60 Hz

kVA 1.2 1.2 3.0 3.0 10.5 10.5 1.7 .5 .55

kW 1.0 1.0 2.0 2.0 10 10 1.5 .5 .34

kBTU/Hr 3.4 3.4 6.8 6.8 34 34 5 1.7 1.2

Rated Load (A)200V

48 48 48 48 48 48 10 10 2.4

Rated Load (A)400V

30 – 30 – 30 – – – –

Note: Engine specifications are per engine. Duplex systems will have two engines and two control units.

Table 18. Power cord information for InfoPrint 4100 models MS1, MD1/2, TS1, and TD1/2.

Item

Supplied Plug and Cable Specifications

Worldwide (except U.S.A. andCanada) Chicago, U.S.A.

U.S.A. and Canada (exceptChicago, U.S.A.)

Plug Type Cable Length Plug Type Cable Length Plug TypeCable

Length

Engine none supplied 4.2m (14ft)Hubbell

HBL460P9V051.8m (6ft)

HubbellHBL460P9V05

4.2m (14ft)

ControlUnit

“See Appendix C”on page 233

2.8m (9.2ft)“See Appendix C”

on page 2331.8m (6ft)


2.8m (9.2ft)

Flipper“See Appendix C”



1.8m (6ft)“See Appendix C”


Attention: Outside of the U.S.A. and Canada, the engine power cord is shipped without a plug. Duplex systemswill include two engine power cords and two control unit power cords.

Table 19. Declared acoustical noise emissions in accordance with ISO 9296 for InfoPrint 4100 Models MS1, MD1/2,TS1, and TD1/2.

Declared A-Weighted Sound Power Level,LWAd (B)

Declared A-Weighted Sound Pressure Level,LpAm (dB)

Operating Idling Operating Idling

8.8 7.8 65 58

Notes:

1. LWAd is the statistical upper-limit A-weighted sound power level.

2. LpAm is the mean A-weighted emission sound pressure level measured at one-meter bystander positions.

3. 1 B = 10 dB.

4. All measurements made in conformance with ISO 7779 and declared in conformance with ISO 9296.

5. Operating levels are measured during continuous running with 20-pound forms.


Heat Dissipation, Power, and Acoustics (Models HS2 and HD3/4)Table 20. Heat dissipation and power for InfoPrint 4100 Models HS2 and HD3/4

Engine (per Engine) HS2 andHD4

ControlUnit

HD3Control

Unit

AirBearingBufferFlipper

Sleep Mode Idle Ready ModePrinting (20 lb

paper)


kVA 1.2 1.2 3.0 3.0 12.5 12 1.7 .5 .55

kW 1.0 1.0 2.0 2.0 12 12 1.5 .5 .34

kBTU/Hr 3.4 3.4 6.8 6.8 41 41 5 1.7 1.2

Rated Load (A)200V

48 48 48 48 48 48 10 10 2.4

Rated Load (A)400V

30 – 30 – 30 – – – –


Table 21. Power cord information for InfoPrint 4100 models HS2 and HD3/4

Item


Worldwide (except U.S.A andCanada) Chicago, U.S.A.

U.S.A. and Canada (exceptChicago, U.S.A.)


Length

Engine none supplied 4.2m (14ft)Hubbell

HBL460P9V051.8m (6ft)

HubbellHBL460P9V05

4.2m (14ft)

ControlUnit





2.8m (9.2ft)







Table 22. Declared acoustical noise emissions in accordance with ISO 9296 for InfoPrint 4100 Models HS2 andHD3/4

Declared A-Weighted Sound Power Level,LWAd (B)

Declared A-Weighted Sound Pressure Level,LpAm (dB)

Operating Idling Operating Idling

8.8 7.8 65 58

Notes:



3. 1 B = 10 dB.




Heat Dissipation, Power, and Acoustics (Models HS3 and HD5/6)Table 23. Heat dissipation and power for InfoPrint 4100 Models HS3 and HD5/6

Engine (per Engine) HS3 andHD5/6

ControlUnit

HD5Control

Unit

WT4 AirBearingFlipper

WebCoolingSystemSleep Mode Idle Ready Mode



kVA 1.2 1.2 3.7 3.7 15.5 15.5 1.7 .5 .55 .94

kW 1.0 1.0 2.5 2.5 14.9 14.9 1.5 .5 .34 .5

kBTU/Hr 3.4 3.4 8.5 8.5 50.8 50.8 5 1.7 1.2 2.0

RatedLoad (A)

200V55 55 55 55 55 55 10 10 2.4 4.1

RatedLoad (A)

400V30 – 30 – 30 – – – – –


Table 24. Power cord information for InfoPrint 4100 models HS3 and HD5/6

Item


Worldwide (except U.S.A. andCanada) Chicago, U.S.A

U.S.A. and Canada (exceptChicago, U.S.A)


Length

Engine none supplied 4.2m (14ft)Russelstoll

RS4100P9W1.8m (6ft)

RusselstollRS4100P9W

4.2m (14ft)

ControlUnit





2.8m (9.2ft)

BufferFlipper





4.2m (14ft)


Table 25. Declared acoustical noise emissions in accordance with ISO 9296 for InfoPrint 4100 Models HS3 andHD5/6

Declared A-Weighted Sound Power Level, LWAd (B) Declared A-Weighted Sound Power Level, LpAm (dB)

Operating Idle Operating Idle

8.6 7.4 69 57

Notes:



3. 1 B = 10 dB.




Heat Dissipation, Power, and Acoustics (Models TS2 and TD3/4)Table 26. Heat dissipation and power for InfoPrint 4100 Models TS2 and TD3/4

Engine (per Engine) TS2 andTD3/4

ControlUnit

TD3Control

Unit





kVA 1.2 1.2 3.0 3.0 13.0 12.5 1.7 .5 .55 .94

kW 1.0 1.0 2.0 2.0 12.5 12.5 1.5 .5 .34 .5

kBTU/Hr 3.4 3.4 6.8 6.8 43.0 43.0 5 1.7 1.2 2.0

RatedLoad (A)

200V55 55 55 55 55 55 10 10 2.4 4.1

RatedLoad (A)

400V30 – 30 – 30 – – – – –


Table 27. Power cord information for InfoPrint 4100 models TS2 and TD3/4

Item





Length


RS4100P9W1.8m (6ft)


4.2m (14ft)

ControlUnit





2.8m (9.2ft)







Table 28. Declared acoustical noise emissions in accordance with ISO 9296 for InfoPrint 4100 Models TS2 andTD3/4



8.8 7.8 65 58

Notes:



3. 1 B = 10 dB.




Heat Dissipation, Power, and Acoustics (Models TS3 and TD5/6)Table 29. Heat dissipation and power for InfoPrint 4100 Models TS3 and TD5/6

Engine (per Engine) TS3 andTD5/6

ControlUnit

TD5Control

Unit





kVA 1.2 1.2 3.7 3.7 16.0 16.0 1.7 .5 .55 .94

kW 1.0 1.0 2.5 2.5 15.4 15.4 1.5 .5 .34 .5

kBTU/Hr 3.4 3.4 8.5 8.5 53.0 53.0 5 1.7 1.2 2.0

RatedLoad (A)

200V55 55 55 55 55 55 10 10 2.4 4.1

RatedLoad (A)

400V30 – 30 – 30 – – – – –


Table 30. Power cord information for InfoPrint 4100 models TS3 and TD5/6

Item





Length


RS4100P9W1.8m (6ft)


4.2m (14ft)

ControlUnit





2.8m (9.2ft)







Table 31. Declared acoustical noise emissions in accordance with ISO 9296 for InfoPrint 4100 Models TS2 andTD3/4



8.6 7.4 69 57

Space RequirementsThe InfoPrint 4100 models are 990.6 mm (39 in.) in width. Special accommodations such as widerdoorways may be necessary.

The minimum size for Channel Cable Access opening is 200 x 200 mm (8 x 8 in).


For printing systems with the Customer Changeable Developers (like the InfoPrint 4100), space must beallocated for the developer cart and CE Service Rail.

Duplex SystemsThis section describes the following suggested duplex configurations: Inline, Left-Angle, and 'H'. Alternativeconfigurations should be discussed with your marketing representative.

If you are using the Web Cooling System with InfoPrint models HD3/4, HD5/6, TD3/4, or TD5/6, see “WebCooling System” on page 7.

The dimensions of the Duplex Printing System and the Buffer/Flipper Unit (1), the optimum separation ofthe units, the service clearance around the allowable configurations of these units, and the power cableand channel cable locations are shown in the following figures.


Inline Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6, TD1/2, TD3/4,and TD5/6 with Web Cooling System

Notes:

1. The web cooling system provides the best cooling solution for the web during high speed printing, andreduces the footprint required.

2. For adequate cooling, allow between 3660 mm (12 feet) and 5486 mm (18 feet) between the formsexit area of the last engine (both engines in a dual simplex configuration, engine 2 in duplexconfiguration, or engine 1 in a simplex configuration) and the point in the postprocessing device wherethe forms are stacked, folded, or rewound. Whatever length is used, paper temperature must be lessthan or equal to 50° C (122° F) at that point in postprocessing to avoid toner transfer problems.

3. Service clearance of 1574 mm (62 in.) is required in front of the printer with or without the CCD Cartfeature. Service clearance of 1524 mm (60 in.) is required in back of the printer

4. For information about outlets and power cables, see “Power Outlet and Cable Summary” on page 78.

5. The minimum spacing between the engines with the cooling system installed is 2591 mm (102 inches).This spacing can be used if the room temperature is below 23C (74F) and the basis weight of theforms being used is 24 pounds or less. If these conditions cannot be met, the minimum spacing shouldbe 2997 mm (118 inches).

Figure 35. Inline configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6, TD1/2, TD3/4, and TD5/6 with WebCooling System


Left-Angle Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6, TD1/2,TD3/4, and TD5/6 with Web Cooling System

Notes:


2. With the Signature Page feature, an additional 305 mm (12 in.) are required between the output ofPrinter 1 and the Buffer/Flipper Unit

3. Service clearance of 1574 mm (62 in.) is required with or without the CCD Cart feature.

4. Figures are not drawn to scale.


Figure 36. Left-Angle configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6, TD1/2, TD3/4, and TD5/6 withWeb Cooling System


‘H’ Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6, TD1/2, TD3/4, andTD5/6 with Web Cooling System

Notes:


2. Service clearance of 1574 mm (62 in.) is required with/without the CCD Cart feature.



Turn Bar (adjustable)

Vacuum Unit

Printer 1Printer 2

Front

Front

Mai

nten

ance

Are

a

g5au

d247

Maintenance Area

750mm Walkover

750mm Walkover

Turn Bar (fixed)

860(33.8)

1498(59)

660(26)

2692(106)

492(19.37)

467(18.4)

990(39)

990(39)

2610(103)

1524(60)

1524(60)

1600(63)

CableAccess

English measurement in inchesare shown in parentheses.

Leveling PadPower CableCasterDeveloper Service Rail or Cart

CableAccess420

(16.5)508(20)

789(31)

6628(261)

965(38)

5558(218.8)

457(18)

965(38)

609(24)

1625(64)

914(36)

CoolingTower

Air Unit

Paper Tray

Figure 37. ‘H’ configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6, TD1/2, TD3/4, and TD5/6 with WebCooling System


Inline Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2 or TD1/2 without Web CoolingSystem

Notes:

1. The Tall Buffer/Flipper Unit is required for Models MD1/2 or TD1/2 in the inline configuration withoutthe Web Cooling System.






Maintenance Area

Front

Printer 2

Leveling PadPower Cable

Caster

660(26)

English measurements in inchesare shown in parentheses. Largermeasurements are converted to feet.

Channel Cable Access

990(39)

914(36)

832(32.75)

789(31)

965(38)

492(19.37)

914(36)

420(16.5)

467(18.4)

g5au

d233

9804(386 = 32'-2")

2692(106)

1574(62)

Developer Service Rail or Cart

1524(60)

Front

Maintenance Area

Printer 1

660(26)

CableAccess

508(20)

965(38)

492(19.37)

914(36)

996(39.25)

420(16.5)

467(18.4)

2997(118)

2692(106)

4089(161 = 13'-5")

TallBuffer Flipper

279(11.0)

Figure 38. Inline configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2 or TD1/2 without Web Cooling System


Inline Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models HD3/4 or TD3/4 without Web CoolingSystem

Notes:

1. The Air Bearing Flipper unit is required for Models HD3/4 or TD3/4 in the inline configuration withoutthe Web Cooling System.

2. A Tall Buffer/Flipper Unit may be added for additional web cooling.

3. With the Signature Page feature, an additional 305 mm (12 in.) are required between the output ofPrinter 1 and the Air Bearing Flipper Unit.





Maintenance Area

Front

Printer 2


Caster

660(26)



990(39)

914(36)

832(32.75)

789(31)

965(38)

492(19.37)

914(36)

420(16.5)

467(18.4)

g5au

d195

9804(386 = 32'-2")

2692(106)

1574(62)


1524(60)

Front

Maintenance Area

Printer 1

660(26)

CableAccess

508(20)

965(38)

492(19.37)

914(36)

996(39.25)

420(16.5)

467(18.4)

2997(118)

2692(106)

4089(161 = 13'-5")

AirBearing

489(19.25)

Figure 39. Inline configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models HD3/4 or TD3/4 without Web Cooling System


Inline Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models HD5/6 or TD5/6 without Web CoolingSystem

Notes:

1. The Tall Buffer/Flipper Unit and the Air Bearing Flipper Unit are required for Models HD5/6 or TD5/6 inthe inline configuration without the Web Cooling System.

2. The inline configuration requires about 27 square feet more floor space than earlier InfoPrint 4100models. The shaded areas indicate where changes were made to the inline configuration compared toearlier models. The Tall Buffer/Flipper Unit was added to provide the additional paper length requiredfor adequate cooling when running at high speeds. Approximately 23.5 additional inches of floor spacebetween the printers is required to accommodate the Tall Buffer/Flipper Unit.






Maintenance Area

Front

Printer 2


Caster

660(26)



TallBuffer Flipper

279(11.0)

990(39)

914(36)

832(32.75)

789(31)

965(38)

492(19.37)

914(36)

420(16.5)

467(18.4)

g5au

d092

9804(386 = 32'-2")

2692(106)

1574(62)


1524(60)

Front

Maintenance Area

Printer 1

660(26)

CableAccess

508(20)

965(38)

492(19.37)

914(36)

996(39.25)

420(16.5)

467(18.4)

2997(118)

2692(106)

4089(161 = 13'-5")

AirBearing

489(19.25)

Figure 40. Inline configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models HD5/6 or TD5/6 without Web Cooling System


Left-Angle Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6, TD1/2,TD3/4, and TD5/6 without Web Cooling System

Notes:

1. The Tall Buffer/Flipper Unit is required for Models MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6, TD1/2, TD3/4, and TD5/6 inthe left-angle configuration without the Web Cooling System.

2. For adequate cooling, allow between 3660 mm (12 feet) and 5486 mm (18 feet) between the formsexit area of the last engine (both engines in a dual simplex configuration, engine 2 in duplexconfiguration, or engine 1 in a simplex configuration) and the point in the postprocessing device wherethe forms are stacked, folded, or rewound. Whatever length is used, paper temperature must be lessthan or equal to 50° C (122° F) at that point in postprocessing to avoid toner transferproblems.Whatever length is used, paper temperature must be less than or equal to 50° C (122° F) atthat point in postprocessing to avoid toner transfer problems.



Figure 41. Left-angle configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6, TD1/2, TD3/4, and TD5/6 withoutWeb Cooling System





‘H’ Configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6, TD1/2, TD3/4, andTD5/6 without Web Cooling System

Notes:

1. The Tall Buffer/Flipper Unit is required for Models MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6, TD1/2, TD3/4, and TD5/6 inthe 'H' configuration without the Web Cooling System.

2. For adequate cooling, allow between 3660 mm (12 feet) and 5486 mm (18 feet) between the formsexit area of the last engine (both engines in a dual simplex configuration, engine 2 in duplexconfiguration, or engine 1 in a simplex configuration) and the point in the postprocessing device wherethe forms are stacked, folded, or rewound. Paper temperature must be less than or equal to 50° C(122° F) at that point in the postprocessor to avoid toner transfer problems.

3. Service clearance of 1574 mm (62 in.) is required with/without the CCD Cart feature.



Figure 42. ‘H’ configuration for InfoPrint 4100 Models MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6, TD1/2, TD3/4, and TD5/6 without WebCooling System


Important

v The customer-provided turnbar is not available from Ricoh and must be ordered through a pre/postvendor. It must be ordered, delivered, and ready to use before installation time.


Simplex Systems

InfoPrint 4100 ModelsFigure 43 shows the dimensions of the printer, space and service clearance, and power cable and channelcable locations for all InfoPrint 4100 Models.

Notes:

1. To allow for adequate cooling, a minimum paper length of 1830 mm (6 feet) is required between theforms exit area and a postprocessing device. Additional space may be required when printing certainapplications, such as when using heavy paper.

2. The power cable shown on the printer control unit applies to InfoPrint 4100 Models HS3, HD5/6, TS3,and TD5/6 only.



Front

Maintenance Area

Printer 1

660(26)

CableAccess

965(38)

492(19.37)

420(16.5)

467(18.4)

g5au

d198

2692(106)

English measurements in inchesare shown in parentheses.

Leveling Pad

Power Cable

Caster

914(36)

990(39)

4115(162" = 13'-6")

1574(62)


1524(60)

4089(161 = 13'-5")

990(39)

508(20")

Figure 43. Dimensions, service clearance, power cable, and cable locations for InfoPrint 4100 Models


Physical LayoutAs you plan your physical layout, be sure to:

v Install the printer away from the main traffic pattern. Allow space for operators and Customer SupportSpecialists to perform their tasks. This space should not extend into walkways.

v Install the printer in a location that is convenient for the operator. For example, consider whether theplanned location is close to printer supply storage areas and to output distribution areas.

v Allow 2100 mm (83 inches) between the floor and the lowest permanently attached object above theprinter, such as a light or a cable rail. This layout gives printer operators and Customer SupportSpecialists space in which to work.

v Allow 1520 mm (60 inches) between any outside surface of the printer and an adjacent wall to preventambient heat rise. If the specified clearance cannot be achieved, see “Installation Requirements” onpage 104.

v For adequate cooling, allow between 3660 mm (12 feet) and 5486 mm (18 feet) between the forms exitarea of the last engine (both engines in a dual simplex configuration, engine 2 in duplex configuration,or engine 1 in a simplex configuration) and the point in the postprocessing device where the forms arestacked, folded, or rewound. Whatever length is used, paper temperature must be less than or equal to50° C (122° F) at that point in postprocessing to avoid toner transfer problems.

Shipping NotesAs you plan for the arrival of the printer, note that:

v Each printer is shipped on two separate pallets: one pallet for the printer frame and a second pallet forthe control unit frame. For sizes and weights, see Table 32 on page 102, and Table 34 on page 102.

v In addition to the pallets, one or two additional cartons are shipped with the printer. These cartonscontain options and miscellaneous hardware necessary to install the printer.

v Check the route that the printers must travel from your loading dock to the location where they will beinstalled to ensure that they fit through the doorways and halls. The printers are wider than a standarddoorway.


Physical Dimensions

Approximate dimensions of the printer frames and control units are shown in Table 32 and Table 33.Approximate dimensions of the Buffer/Flipper Units are shown in Table 33.

Table 32. Approximate frame physical dimensions and weights uncrated for the InfoPrint 4100 Models MS1, HS2,HS3, MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6, TS1, TS2, TS3, TD1/2, TD3/4, and TD5/6

DimensionAll Print Engine Models (per

Engine)Printer 1 Control Unit Printer 2 Control Unit1

Depth2 990 mm (39 in.) 990 mm (39 in.) 990 mm (39 in.)

Height 1550 mm (61 in.) 1550 mm (61 in.) 1550 mm (61 in.)

Length 1905 mm (75 in.) 789 mm (31 in.) 789 mm (31 in.)

Weight 1023 kg (2250 lb) 227 kg (500 lb) 249 kg (550 lb)3

Notes:

1. Simplex or printer 2 in a duplex system.

2. The printer is wider than a standard doorway.

3. Including the weight of the printer controller.

4. Floor loading is estimated to be approximately 105 lbs/sq. in. (average) distributed across the seven feet underthe engine section and approximately 40 lbs./sq. in. (average) under the control unit section.

Table 33. Approximate frame physical dimensions and weights uncrated for the Buffer/Flipper Units

Dimension Tall Buffer/Flipper Air Bearing Buffer/Flipper Unit

Depth 635 mm (25 in.) 832 mm (32.75 in.)

Height 1600 mm (64 in.) 1245 mm (49 in.)

Length 279 mm (11 in.) 489 mm (19.25 in.)

Weight 32 kg (70 lb.) 145 kg (320 lb.)

Table 34. Printer frame physical dimensions when crated1

Dimension Simplex Models Duplex Models

Depth 1181 mm (46.5 in.) 1181 mm (46.5 in.)

Height 1791 mm (70.5 in.) 1791 mm (70.5 in.)

Length 2032 mm (80.0 in.) 2032 mm (80.0 in.)

Weight 1149 kg (2533 lb) 1149 kg (2533 lb)


Physical Attachment RequirementsThe system programmer, the Ricoh representative, and the physical planner plan the channel-cable routebetween the controlling computers and the printer.

v For Ethernet, copper cabling must meet specifications in ANSI/IEEE Standard 802.3a, b, c, and e.

– Ethernet Twisted Pair

- To connect to 100BaseT LAN or 1000BaseT LAN, use category 5 or category 6 unshieldedtwisted pair (UTP) cabling supplied by the customer with a RJ45 connector.

- To connect to 10BaseT LAN, use category 3, 4, or 5 (UTP) cabling supplied by the customer witha RJ45 connector.

– The building cabling must conform to EIA-569 standard. Which includes that the cable should be setaway from an EMI source. Some excerpts from the standard show the minimum distance from:

- Transformers and electric motors: 40 inches.

- Power Source at 480 V or less, Unshielded power lines or electrical equipment in proximity toopen or non-metal pathways: 24 inches.

- Unshielded power lines or electrical equipment in proximity to grounded metal conduit pathway.Power lines enclosed in a grounded metal conduit in proximity to grounded metal conduit pathway:12 inches.

- Fluorescent lighting: 12 inches.

v For Gigabit Ethernet SX, fiber optic cabling must meet the specifications in IEEE standard 802.3 (2000).Consult Planning for Fiber Optic Links when planning fiber optic connections.

v For Gigabit Ethernet TX, cabling must meet the specifications in IEEE standard 802.3 (2000).

v For FICON and ESCON channels — Refer to Planning for Fiber Optic Links for definitions of the cablegroups and the maximum cable lengths for the printer.

When you order your printer, also order cables for Ethernet or the FICON or ESCON channel, plus anychannel extenders, converters, directors, switching boxes, terminators, or multi-station access unitsrequired in the interface.


Installation RequirementsA Customer Support Specialist installs the printer. However, you are responsible for the followingpre-installation tasks:

v Ensure that the environmental, electrical, and space requirements specified in this chapter are met. Usethe “Installation Planning Work Sheet” on page 174 to complete this step.

v With a Duplex Configuration, if the required distance between the printer and an adjacent wall cannotbe achieved, install air blowers to circulate air between the printer and the wall.

v Ensure that a forklift and forklift operator are available at delivery to remove the printer from its shippingpallet.

After the printer is removed from the shipping pallet, you can move it on its own casters to the desiredlocation.

Note: As soon as possible after your printer arrives, unpack it and check for external damage. If thecovers are broken, bent, or scratched, work with the shipping contractor and your marketingrepresentative to resolve the problem.

v Inspect the receiving area and the areas through which the printer must be moved. Ensure that noobstacles interfere with moving the printer to its planned location. Consider the following:

– The forklift needs space in which to operate.

– Ensure that halls and doorways are large enough for the printer to pass through (see Table 32 onpage 102).

– Ensure that hall corners and angles are large enough to permit the printer to turn.

– Ramps must have no more than a 13° incline.

– Elevators and elevator doorways must be able to accommodate the size and weight of the printerand the people who are moving it.

– Stairs, door sills, floor gaps, and carpeting can make it impossible to roll the printer.

v Ensure that the floor is level within ±1°.

v Ensure that the correct adapter cables and hardware are available for Ethernet LANs, FICON channels,or ESCON channels.

v Ensure that approved electrical outlets with correct power are reserved for the printer, and that they canbe reached with the power cables. The approximate locations of the printer power cable and the signalcommunication cable areas are shown earlier in this chapter.

v Ensure that a separate ground wire for all connections from the printer engine, the printer control unit,and all pre/postprocessors go to the ground bus bar of the circuit breaker box.

v Ensure that the ground wire and the neutral wire between the circuit breaker box and the source(building ground) are separate wires; one wire is for neutral and one is for ground.

v Ensure that the printer engine power and the control unit power go to the same circuit breaker box.

v If you are installing the printer on a raised floor, ensure that the access holes in the raised floor arelarge enough for both the channel cable and the power cable, and ensure that the raised floor panelsunder the right side (developer side) of the printer are vented (perforated with holes) to prevent internalheat rise.


Chapter 6. Selecting and Testing Forms

Chapter OverviewThis chapter reviews the basic requirements for print materials intended for use on InfoPrint 4100Models HS3, HD5/6, TS3, and TD5/6 printers.

To get maximum reliability and print quality from the printer, Ricoh recommends that you rely on the FormsDesign Reference for Continuous Forms Advanced Function Printers, your forms supplier, and yourmarketing representative to help you choose the best forms and special-purpose materials for yourapplications.

Continuous FormsThe printer generally uses single-ply, fanfold forms with both edges punched for tractor feeding and withhorizontal perforations between the sheets. Micro-perforated forms can be used for cleaner cuts betweensheets. With appropriate pre-processing and post-processing devices attached, the printer can also useroll-feed forms.

Special-Purpose MaterialsDiscuss your special-purpose applications with your forms suppliers and ensure that they understand thatthe forms are being run on a printer. Before you use new preprinted forms for production runs, test thejobs that print them to ensure everything works well.

Work closely with your marketing representative while you are selecting what kinds of forms andspecial-purpose materials to use. Your marketing representative can give you technical help, shareinformation from other successful printer users, and help you design your own special materials.

Preprinted FormsIf you are planning to use preprinted forms (for example, your company letterhead), ensure that the ink isdesigned for nonimpact printing. Certain inks are likely to rub off or smear after they have been heated bythe fuser. Remember the following recommendations when selecting ink for preprinted forms:

v Use offset lithography to make preprinted forms for the printer.

v Choose laser inks that can tolerate the high temperatures in the fuser. Generally, oxidation-cured,oil-based inks withstand high temperatures better than latex inks.

v Allow plenty of drying time (from 1 to 2 weeks) before running preprinted forms through the printer. Thisis especially important when oil-based inks are used. Drying should take place in a mild environment of15° to 27°C (60° to 80°F) and 35% to 50% relative humidity.

v Limit the amount of ink on the preprinted forms.

v Limit the use of oxidation retardants on the printing press when oxidation-cured inks are used.

v Choose forms with a surface that absorbs ink well. Avoid forms with a ribbed or heavy surface becausethey do not absorb ink well.

Storing Print MaterialsStore forms and special-purpose materials in an area where temperature and humidity are similar to theenvironment in which they are used. If forms are allowed to absorb too much moisture, wrinkles and blankspots may result.

105

Avoid areas with extreme heat or humidity. Extended exposure to these extremes can permanentlydamage the materials. Also, storing forms in an area where relative humidity is above 65% may result inreduced print quality.

Testing Forms and ApplicationsAn ideal application for the printer would print standard-font text and simple images on plain white paper,75-g/m² (20-lb) bond. This paper would be manufactured specifically for use in nonimpact printers, andwould be free of binder holes, cut-outs, and other cuts. The page layout would keep text and images awayfrom perforations. After leaving the printer, output from an ideal application would be allowed to cool, andwould receive minimal handling, rubbing, and creasing.

When it is processing an ideal application, the printer can deliver maximum print quality and reliability. Withapplications that deviate from the ideal, print quality may decrease, and the need for operator interventionsmay increase. This does not mean that the printer cannot be used for the application; it does mean thatyou need to test the application.

For detailed information on deciding what forms and applications to test and how to test them, refer toForms Design Reference for Continuous Forms Advanced Function Printers


Valid Form Lengths in InchesTable 35. Examples of some valid form lengths in inches

If the Form Length is: Use this value at the Touch PanelUse this value at the Stacker

Control Panel:

3.0 3.0 See note 2

3¹/₂ 3.5 See note 2

4.0 4.0 See note 2

4¹/₂ 4.5 See note 2

5.0 5.0 See note 2

5¹/₂ 5.5 See note 2

6.0 6.0 See note 2

6¹/₂ 6.5 See note 2

7.0 7.0 7.0

7¹/₂ 7.5 7¹/₂

8.0 8.0 8.0

8¹/₆ 8.1 See note 1

8¹/₃ 8.3 8¹/₃

8¹/₂ 8.5 8

8²/₃ 8.6 8²/₃

8⁵/₆ 8.8 See note 1

9.0 9.0 9.0

9¹/₂ 9.5 9¹/₂

10.0 10.0 10.0

10¹/₂ 10.5 10¹/₂

11.0 11.0 11.0

... ... ...

28.0 28.0 28.0

Notes:

1. The form lengths shown are examples only. You can enter form lengths in one-sixth of an inch increments at thetouch panel. For reference, see 8¹/₃ and 8²/₃ above.

The stacker control panel does not allow form lengths in one-sixth of an inch. The smallest increment allowed onthe stacker control panel is one-third of an inch.

2. The setting equals the forms length as measured from fold perforation to fold perforation. InfoPrint 4100 ModelsDO NOT support page sizes less than 76 mm (3 inches) in length.

3. Form lengths as prefolded greater than 17.0 inches up to the maximum are permissible if a postprocessingdevice is installed and enabled.

Form lengths greater than 28 inches can be used if the Signature Page feature (FC 4553) is installed.

Chapter 6. Selecting and Testing Forms 107


Chapter 7. Setting Printer Definition Values

Chapter OverviewThis chapter describes how to set and update the printer definition. Please note the table containsinformation on all possible choices across the various models. Not all entries are applicable to allmodels.

Appendix B, “Work Sheets,” on page 173 contains work sheets you can use to record your definitionchoices

You can define the printer in the categories of information described in the following sections:

v “Changing the Language of Messages”

v “Changing Access Levels and Passwords” on page 110

v “Defining the Printer” on page 112

v “Defining Adapters” on page 142

v “Defining Protocols” on page 143

v “Defining Remote Access” on page 144

v “Defining Interfaces and Preprocessing or Postprocessing Devices” on page 149

Changing the Language of MessagesThis procedure changes the language used for all text within the console panels and windows, and (exceptfor Russian, Korean, Simplified Chinese, or Traditional Chinese) on the printer operator panel display aswell. When you select Russian, Korean, Simplified Chinese, or Traditional Chinese, the printer operatorpanel displays U.S. English text.

Once you change the language, it remains in effect until changed again with this procedure.

A selection box lists the available language choices. A scroll bar on the right side of the box displaysadditional choices not shown in the box, and highlights the current choice. The options are:

v English

v Spanish

v German

v Japanese

v French

v Italian

v Brazilian Portuguese

v Simplified Chinese

v Traditional Chinese

v Korean

v Russian

Changing the languagePrinter Definition → Printer → Basic → Language

109

Changing Access Levels and PasswordsThe different levels of authorization are:

v Operator: No password is required for access to Operator procedures.

v Administrator: The Administrator has access to all functions except those related to the service andrepair of the printer.

v Customer Support Specialist: The Customer Support Specialist has access to all functions of theprinter.

Initial OperationWhen the printers are shipped from the factory, they are set for the Administrator user authorizationlevel. This makes all procedures except service-related activities available. The factory-set passwordis empty. That is, if you change the user level to the Operator level and then want to go back to theAdministrator level, simply select Administrator and OK on the Logon panel when it appears. Youdo not need to enter any data.

If you want to maintain an Administrator authorization level, Ricoh recommends that you establish anew password for the Administrator when the installation of the system is complete. If you treat alloperators as administrators, then leave the current "all blanks" password as it is. When the printer ispowered on and there is an Administrator password you are logged on as Operator. If there is nopassword you are logged on as Administrator.

If the current Administrator password is forgotten or lost, the system accepts a fixed, alternatepassword for that level. Obtain this alternate password from your system administrator.

You can create new user or operator identities. See “Managing and Defining New Users” for moredetails. This allows you to customize the functions that individual users have authority to perform.The capability to manage users is available by default to the Administrator and Service authorizationlevels.

This procedure lets you set the authorization level of the person working on the printer and change theuser authorization password. Access to higher user authorization levels is protected by a password. If thecurrent password is not known, access to the requested user authorization level is denied.

1. On the Main touch panel, select Logon to display the Logon window.

2. On the Logon window, select the User ID that you want to change and select OK.

If the User ID you are changing to has a password, the Enter Password window displays. Enter thepassword and select OK.

Note: To change a password for a User ID, you must be logged on with that user ID and the user IDcannot be the default login user ID.

3. To change a password:

a. Select Change Password.... You see the Change Password window.

b. Enter the old password.

c. Enter the new password (twice).

d. Select OK to change the password or Cancel if you decide not to change the password.

Managing and Defining New UsersYou can create new user identities.

1. On the Main touch panel, select Logon to display the Logon window.


2. On the Logon window, select Manage Users.... You see the Defined Users window, which lists allusers that are defined and visible to the current user. For example, if you are logged in asAdministrator, all users who are subsets of the Administrator and Operator access authority levels willbe visible in the list.

3. To add a new user:

a. Select New User.... You see the New User window, which lets you specify a new user name, theaccess authority level for the user, and an optional password.

b. Enter the new user name in the Name field.

c. Select an access authority level from the Console Access Authority list. This access authorityallows the specified user to use the console.

d. Select an access authority level from the Online Access Authority list. This access authorityallows users to access the printer using InfoPrint Online Access (Web Pages).

e. Enter a password if desired.

f. Select OK to save your changes or Cancel to quit without saving your changes.

4. To specify a subset of functions to apply to the new user login:

a. Select the user name from the Defined Users list.

b. Select User Functions.... You see the User Functions window, which displays all functions that areavailable to the user, depending on the access authority level you selected.

c. For functions that you do not want the user to access, select the functions from the Functions listand use the arrows to add those functions to the Functions Unavailable to 'User' list. Then selectClose.

You can also use the arrows to remove items from the Functions Unavailable to 'User' list.

5. To manage users in other ways:

a. Make the user the default login after a reboot by selecting Yes for Default Login, which willchange to Yes.

b. Select a console display language for each user by selecting a language from the Languagedrop-down list.

Note: Select Default if you do not want to override the language set in Printer Definition →Printer → Basic.

c. Customize two hot buttons that will display on the Main touch panel for each user. From theCustom Button 1 or Custom Button 2 drop-down list, select the panel you want the hot button todisplay.

6. Select OK when you have customized the settings on this panel.

Chapter 7. Setting Printer Definition Values 111

Defining the PrinterThis procedure lets you view or update a copy of the printer definition.

Note: The printer can have multiple sets of definition data: one for each mode in which the printer canoperate. To update a definition for a particular mode, the printer must be running in that mode.

Printing printer dataMaintenance → Print Samples → Printer Configuration

ImportantPrinter data is always printed in U.S. English regardless of the language used on the touch panel.

Configuring the PrinterTo view printer configuration settings, select Printer Definition → Printer. You must stop the printer tomake any configuration changes.

Note: To see descriptions and the ranges of values you can enter in the fields, select the field on any ofthe Printer Definition panels and press F1 on the keyboard or press and hold the left mouse buttonfor 2 seconds.

To change printer configuration settings:

1. Change any incorrect configuration settings on the panels.

2. When you have made all the changes, select OK.

3. Restart the printer, if instructions to do so are given.

4. Select Start on the Main touch panel to make the printer Ready.

Printer Definition InformationThe following tables describe all printer configuration items, what each is used for, and the allowable valueoptions for each item. The factory set default value options are underlined or separately specified.

Important! The printer definition tables list all configuration items for InfoPrint 4100 Models MS1, HS2,HS3, MD1/2, HD3/4, and HD5/6 printers. Some items may be grayed out or not shown on particularmodels.

v Configuration items marked (D) appear only for duplex systems.

v Configuration items marked (S) appear only for simplex systems.

v All unmarked items appear for both duplex and simplex systems.

v ‡ indicates items that are saved in Snapshots.


Table 36. Settings for Printer Definition → Print Quality

Definition Item Description Value Options

Printer Definition → Print Quality

Printer 1 Contrast ‡ This entry is used to adjust the contrast (toner density) ofprint on the forms.

This setting is saved in the current Snapshot when yousave the current setting to the Snapshot.

1 to 7

Default is 4

Printer 1 Boldness ‡ This entry is used to change the vector boldness. Theboldness is expressed as a percentage of stroke width.


0 to 100

Default is 50

Printer 1 PreheatTemperature ‡

This entry is used to adjust the preheat platentemperature. The value entered is a relative number, not ameasure of degrees, with 1 being the coolest and 100being the hottest.


1 to 100

Default is 50

Printer 1 FuserTemperature ‡

This entry is used to adjust the hot roll temperature. Thevalue entered is a relative number, not a measure ofdegrees, with 1 being the coolest and 100 being thehottest.


1 to 100

Default is 50

Printer 1 Oil Rate ‡ This entry is used to adjust the amount of oil fed to the oilbelt or oil roller. The value entered is a relative number,not a measure of quantity, with 1 being the lowest rateand 100 being the highest rate.


1 to 100

Default is 50

Printer 1 Oil Belt ‡ This entry is used to adjust the speed at which the oil beltmoves. The value entered is a relative number, not ameasure of speed, with 1 being the slowest speed and100 being the fastest speed.


2 to 100

Default is 50

RecommendedSettings

Shows the recommended settings for preheattemperature, fuser temperature, oil rate, and oil belttemperature for various toner types and paper weights.Selecting the paper weight range from the drop-down listadjusts the corresponding sliders to show recommendedsettings for the selected paper weight.

These settings are saved in the current Snapshot whenyou save the current setting to the Snapshot.

v < 75 gsm (< 20 pounds)

v 75 - 95 gsm (20 - 26 pounds)

v > 98 gsm (> 26 pounds)

v Commercial Print

Printer 2 Contrast (D)‡

See entry for Printer 1. See entry for Printer 1.

This setting is saved in the currentSnapshot when you save thecurrent setting to the Snapshot.


|

Table 36. Settings for Printer Definition → Print Quality (continued)


Printer 2 Boldness(D) ‡



Printer 2 PreheatTemperature (D) ‡



Printer 2 FuserTemperature (D) ‡



Printer 2 Oil Rate (D)‡



Printer 2 Oil Belt (D)‡



Printer Definition → Print Quality → Advanced

Printer 1 Use BackupIdler Roll ‡

This entry indicates whether the backup idler roll (BIR) isto be used to improve fusing and reduce bloom.Note: The service representative must enable thisconfiguration item using Printer Definition → Printer →Service where you must state whether the backup idlerroll is physically installed.

Default allows the BIR to be switched on or offautomatically depending on whether the printer is induplex or simplex mode.

Yes overrides normal operation and always uses thebackup idler roll.

No overrides normal operation and never uses the backupidler roll.


v Default

v Yes

v No

Printer 1 PreheatOffset ‡

(Service Change Only) This entry is used to specifytemperature delta between the lower preheat platen (basetemperature) and the upper preheat platen (variabletemperature). To operate with the default settings insteadof the variable temperature offsets, select Use DefaultSettings.


-100 to 20




Printer 2 Use BackupIdler Roll (D) ‡

See description for Printer 1. See entry for Printer 1.


Printer 2 PreheatOffset ‡

(Service Change Only) See description for Printer 1. See entry for Printer 1.


Fuser Startup Boost This entry is used when a soft hot roll is installed toincrease hot roll temperature at startup time.


v Nonev Lowv Middlev High

Default is High

Lower Tension ArmPressure

This entry is used to specify the amount of pressureapplied by the lower tension arm.


v Normalv Mediumv High

Default is Normal

Set to Medium for forms < 75 gsm

Lower Tension ArmStartup Timing

This entry is used to specify when the lower tension armis engaged.


−8 to 18

Default is 0

Urge Unit Drive RollControl

(Service Change Only)

Setting this entry to a value other than No drive willperiodically cause the urge unit drive roll to move theforms in the input area when the printer is idle.


v No drivev 10 min.v 60 min.

Default is No drive

Printer Definition → Print Quality → Beam Adjustments

Printer 1 Beam 1Offset Adjustment

(Service Change Only) Beam adjustment is used bymaintenance personnel to control the vertical alignment orhorizontal adjustment of the separate beams of amulti-beam printer. See “AOM Skew” in the Multi-BeamPrinthead section of “Removal and Adjustments” withinthe Maintenance Information.

Beam 1 cannot be changed.


(See information in Beam 1 offset adjustment) 0.0 to 15.9

Default is 8.0 units

Unit = .1 pel.


(See information in Beam 1 offset adjustment) (See information in Beam 2 offsetadjustment)






|||

||

||||

|

||||

||

|||

|

|

||||

||

|

|

|||

|||

||

|||

|




(See information in Printer 1 Beam 1 offset adjustment) Beam 1 cannot be changed.


(See information in Printer 1 Beam 1 offset adjustment) (See information in Printer 1Beam 2 offset adjustment)







Printer Definition → Print Quality → PQE Adjustments

Printer 1 BeamNumber

(Service Change Only) This entry allows you to select abeam on which to make print quality enhancements.Selecting All changes the settings for each beam,overriding any changes you have made for specificbeams.

v All

v 1 to 5

Printer 1 CurrentVector

(Service Change Only) 0 to 7

Printer 1 VectorBoldness


Printer 1 HorizontalHigh


Printer 1 HorizontalLow


Printer 1 VerticalHigh


Printer 1 Vertical Low (Service Change Only) 0 to 63

Printer 2 BeamNumber


Printer 2 CurrentVector


Printer 2 VectorBoldness


Printer 2 HorizontalHigh


Printer 2 HorizontalLow


Printer 2 VerticalHigh


Printer 2 Vertical Low See entry for Printer 1. See entry for Printer 1.


Table 37. Settings for Printer Definition → Printer → Basic


Printer Definition → Printer → Basic

Printer Mode This entry allows setting whether the duplex system is tobe operated in duplex or simplex (dual-simplex) mode.

When you change this value, you must restart the printerfor the change to take effect. If you are in dual-simplexmode, both printers need to be restarted.

v Duplex

v Simplex

Printer Speed ‡ Use Printer Speed to control the printer speed. Use Highfor normal operations. Use Low for situations involvingheavy weight or other hard to fuse papers.Note: Print speed does not apply to InfoPrint 4100Models MS1 or MD1/2.


v High

v Low

Side 2 Verify (D) This feature automatically checks to make sure that theduplex printing system is properly aligned and that theprinting on both sides of the form is synchronized.Note: This field is displayed only if the Side 2 VerifyDisable feature (RPQ 8B4282) is installed.

v Enable

v Disable

Front SheetSequence (D) ‡

This entry sets whether the front side of the form will beprinted on Printer 1 or Printer 2 in duplex mode.

Front First means that the odd pages (1st, 3rd, 5th,...) ofa customer job will print on Printer 1, and the even pages(2nd, 4th, 6th, ...) pages will print on Printer 2. FrontSecond means just the opposite of Front First.

If a postprocessing device that bursts and stacks theoutput is being used, the Front Second setting will deliveroutput with the odd number pages facing to the front. Thisthe preferred setting when you want the pages to stack inorder.


v Front First

v Front Second

Same Side Printing‡ Printer 2 will print on the same side of the paper asPrinter 1 (the paper is not being flipped over betweenmachines).


v No

v Yes for duplex data

v Yes for color


Table 37. Settings for Printer Definition → Printer → Basic (continued)


Eject to Front Facing‡

Box paper unfolds accordion style, alternating pagesbetween front facing and back facing. This entry allowsaccepting or rejecting the Eject to Front Facing (EFF)signals sent by the host. When set to Disabled, EFFsignals are suppressed. When set to Enabled, the EFFsignal from the host will cause a blank page to beinserted between print jobs if the prior job contained anodd number of pages. When set, Forms -> Front Facingcan be used to adjust whether the form is front facing orrear facing.

When you change this value, you must restart the printerfor the change to take effect.

This option should be set to Disabled if a postprocessingdevice that bursts and stacks output pages is installed.


v Enabled

v Disabled

Auto NPRO at EOF‡

This entry indicates whether an automatic nonprocessrunout (NPRO) is performed when an End of Forms isdetected. During an NPRO, the forms move through theprinter with no new pages being printed.


v Yes

v No

Language This entry changes the language used for all text withinthe console panels and windows, and (except for Russian,Korean, Simplified Chinese, or Traditional Chinese) on theprinter operator panel display as well. When you selectRussian, Korean, Simplified Chinese, or TraditionalChinese, the printer operator panel displays U.S. Englishtext.Note: This affects only operator and administrator accesslevels. Service-level access always displays the consolein English.

v English

v Spanish

v German

v Japanese Kanji

v French

v Italian




v Korean

v Russian

Keyboard Language (CE Only) Indicates which keyboard is used. This entrychanges the language used for all text within the consolepanels and windows.

v English

v Spanish

v German

v Japanese Kanji

v French

v Italian




v Korean

v Russian


Table 38. Settings for Printer Definition → Printer → Date/Time


Printer Definition → Printer → Date/Time

Date and Time This entry specifies the date and time.

The time is a 24-hour clock.

To adjust, highlight the field to change and press arrow upor arrow down.Note: Manually setting the date/time is an engineer levelonly function and can only be performed by someone withaccess to the password of the day.

yyyy=yearmm=monthdd=dayhh=hourmm=minutess=second

Time Zone Select a time zone from the list.

Time Source Select a time source to define how the time settings areinput to the printer.

Manual uses the time input specified in the Date andTime field above.

Specific Network Server uses the time input from thenetwork time server specified in this field. When thisoption is selected, entry fields for specifying the name andtype of the network time server are displayed. In the TimeServer Name field in the resulting Network window,specify the network name or IP address of the specifiednetwork time server that the printer will request the dateand time from. In the Time Server Type field, select thetime protocol (Time or SNTP) of the specified networktime server that the printer will request the date and timefrom.

Any Network Server uses the time input from anyavailable network time server that the printer can find.Note: When DHCP Plug-and-Play is set to On, theadditional fields that appear for the Specific NetworkServer are not available.

v Manual

v Specific Network Server

v Any Network Server


|||

Table 39. Settings for Printer Definition → Printer → Service


Printer Definition → Printer → Service

Printer 1 MachineSerial

(CE Change on Initial Configuration Only) This is the codefor plant of manufacture of Printer 1 (2 numeric onlycharacters) and sequence number for Printer 1 (7alphanumeric characters).

9 characters

Printer 1 Print Count (Service Change Only) The Print Usage Count from themechanical counter at the rear of the printer may betransferred to this counter, which will then become a newbase count in the running “Printer Count” displayed in themain touch panel.

0 to 2 000 000 000

Printer 1 BackupIdler Roll Installed

(Service Change Only) This entry indicates whether aBackup Idler Roll (BIR) is installed.

v Yes

v No

Toner Type (Service Change Only) Identifies the toner cartridgeinstalled on the printer.

Printer 1 ScanFactory Adjustment600 Pels

(Service Change Only) This is used by service personnelto adjust the scan direction printing registration. See“Registration” in the Printhead section of “Removal andAdjustments” within the Maintenance Information.

0 to 100 units

Default is 40 units

Unit = 2 pels.

Printer 1 ScanFactory Adjustment480 Pels

(Service Change Only) This is used by service personnelto adjust the scan direction printing registration. See“Registration” in the Printhead section of “Removal andAdjustments” within the Maintenance Information.

0 to 100 units

Default is 40 units

Unit = 2 pels.

Printer 1 ProcessFactory Adjustment600 Pels

(Service Change Only) This is used by service personnelto adjust the process direction printing registration. See“Registration” in the Printhead section of “Removal andAdjustments” within the Maintenance Information.

0 to 60 units

Default is 14 units

Unit = 2 pels.

Printer 1 ProcessFactory Adjustment480 Pels

(Service Change Only) This is used by service personnelto adjust the process direction printing registration. See“Registration” in the Printhead section of “Removal andAdjustments” within the Maintenance Information.

0 to 60 units

Default is 14 units

Unit = 2 pels.

Printer 1 BIR DwellTime

(Service Change Only) This is the number of seconds theBIR will engage each time the printer starts printing if theUse Backup Idler Roll setting is to Default.Note: This option only displays when the Backup IdlerRoll Engagement feature is installed.

Default is 30 seconds

Printer 2 MachineSerial (D)


Printer 2 Print Count(D)


Printer 2 BIRInstalled (D)


Toner Type See entry for Printer 1. See entry for Printer 1.

Printer 2 ScanFactory Adjustment600 Pel (D)


Printer 2 ScanFactory Adjustment480 Pel (D)



Table 39. Settings for Printer Definition → Printer → Service (continued)


Printer 2 ProcessFactory Adjustment600 Pel (D)


Printer 2 ProcessFactory Adjustment480 Pel (D)


Printer 2 BIR DwellTime


Printer 2 Side 2Verify Factory Adjust

(Service Change Only) This is used by service personnelto adjust the Side 2 Verify timing (in pels) in the processdirection. Use this adjustment after the print position hasbeen set correctly using Scan Factory Adjustment andProcess Factory Adjustment, if the Side 2 Verify sensorposition cannot or should not be moved. The sensorshould not be moved after it has been adjusted fortractorless mode registration.

20 to 220 pels

Default is 120 pels

Printer 2 Side 1Verify Factory Adjust

(Service Change Only) This is used by service personnelto adjust the Side 1 Verify timing (in pels) in the processdirection. Use this adjustment after the print position hasbeen set correctly using Scan Factory Adjustment andProcess Factory Adjustment, if the Side 1 Verify sensorposition cannot or should not be moved. The sensorshould not be moved after it has been adjusted fortractorless mode registration.Note: This field is available when Dual Sensor Installedis set to Yes (Printer Definition → Printer → Setup →Advanced).

20 to 220 pels

Default is 120 pels


Table 40. Settings for Printer Definition → Printer → Resource Utilization


Printer Definition → Printer → Resource Utilization (Service)

IPDS Font Usage This entry allows you to select the amount of memory thatthe printer control unit (computer) will use for fontmanagement. Select the font usage according to the typeof print jobs you run.

Select Low font usage for jobs using a normal number offonts with normal point sizes, but not double-byte fonts.Medium font usage indicates an abnormal SBCS(single-byte character set) printing mode; select it for jobsusing a large number of fonts or very large point sizes,but not double-byte fonts. High font usage is primarily fordouble-byte font jobs.

v High

v Medium

v Low

IPDS Page SegmentUsage

This entry is used to allocate space for IPDS source forpage segments and overlays. Set to Low if the size ornumber of page segments and overlays is a small. Set toHigh if the size or number of page segments andoverlays is large.

v Unlimited (Disk)

v High (RAM)

v Medium (RAM)

v Low

IPDS Overlay Usage This parameter is used to set overlay caching. Set toNone if overlays are not reused multiple times or ifoverlays are not reused in the same location onsubsequent pages.

v High

v Medium

v Low

v None

IPDS Input BufferSize

This parameter is used to allocate space for the IPDSdata that was just received from the server before beingprocessed by the control unit. Set to Low if pages containlittle data or if printing from PSF for z/OS on a S/370channel or a FICON or ESCON channel (this is becauseof the frequent IPDS acknowledgment rate). Set to High ifprinting pages with large amounts of data (such as largeimages).

v Low

v Medium (RAM)

v High

IPDS Output BufferSize

This parameter is used to allocate space for ready-to-printpages, including pages between the transfer points of acontinuous-forms, duplex printer. Set the value to Low ifthese conditions are met:

v The pages contain little data

v This is a simplex printer

v This is a duplex printer with a distance betweentransfer points of less than 400 inches.

Set the value to High if these conditions are met:

v The pages contain large amounts of data, especiallyshaded areas

v This is a duplex printer with a distance betweentransfer points of over 400 inches.

v Low

v Medium (RAM)

v High


Table 41. Settings for Printer Definition → PDL


Printer Definition → PDL → IPDS

Cut Sheet Emulation‡

Select this option to print on continuous forms as thoughyou were printing on cut-sheet forms. Sheets are dividedin half using an imaginary line that is parallel to the edgeof the form. Each resulting "half sheet" is treated as if itwere a whole sheet running through a cut-sheet printer.

None implies the cut-sheet emulation is not enabled.

Normal Left-to-Right allows the print data to be placedon the left half-sheet first and then the right half-sheet.The left half-sheet is closest to the operator. The physicalorientation of the data is based on the lower-left corner ofthe paper as viewed from the operator's viewpoint.

Normal Right-to-Left allows the print data to be placedon the right half-sheet first and then the left half-sheet.The right half-sheet is furthest from the operator. Thephysical orientation of the data is based on the lower-leftcorner of the paper as viewed from the operator'sviewpoint.

Inverted Left-to-Right allows the print data to be placedon the left half-sheet first and then the right half-sheet.The left half-sheet is furthest from the operator. Thephysical orientation of the data is based on the upper-rightcorner of the paper as viewed from the operator'sviewpoint. This mode is the "upside down" version of theNormal Left-to-Right mode.

Inverted Right-to-Left allows the print data to be placedon the right half-sheet first and then the left half-sheet.The right half-sheet is closest to the operator. Thephysical orientation of the data is based on the upper-rightcorner of the paper as viewed from the operator'sviewpoint. This mode is the "upside down" version of theNormal Right-to-Left mode.

This value is used only when no other value is set duringthe Define Forms procedure for a specific form.


v None

v Normal Left-to-Right

v Normal Right-to-Left

v Inverted Left-to-Right

v Inverted Right-to-Left

IPDS PrintheadResolution ‡

This parameter changes the resolution that the printheadin this printer uses.


v 480

v 600

The values available to youdepend on the model of printer.

To have a selectable IPDSresolution, select 600.


Table 41. Settings for Printer Definition → PDL (continued)


IPDS Resolution ‡ Select an IPDS resolution value for jobs to be receivedfrom the print server. This parameter can only be setwhen the IPDS Printhead Resolution is set to 600 dpibecause an IPDS Printhead Resolution of 480automatically limits IPDS Resolution to 240. When youselect a specific resolution (600, 300, or 240), the printerwill only accept jobs in that resolution. If you selectAutomatic, the printer will accept jobs in any resolution.Note: Not all values are supported on all printers.


v Automatic

v 240

v 300

v 600

The values available to youdepend on the model of printerand the printhead resolutionselected.

Reprint Pages AfterJams‡

This entry controls the conditions the host system uses toretransmit pages after a forms jam, halt, or emergencystop has been cleared.

v Yes - All lost pages are automatically retransmitted andreprinted.

v No recovery for MICR pages - Lost pages printed witha MICR printer will not be retransmitted.

v No - No lost pages will be retransmitted. Any missingor damaged pages must be manually recovered.


v Yes

v No recovery for MICR pages

v No

Logical PageIncrement

This entry allows expansion of the logical page size, forcases where the printed page is larger than the validprintable area, without errors being set.

The value entered will increase the valid printable area bythat number of pels in all directions. Please review yourapplications to ensure that this setting does not causeloss of data, such as printing on the tractor hole carrierstrip that will be trimmed off.

0 to 20 pels

3130 Bar CodeEmulation

This entry controls whether the printer operates in 3130Bar Code Compatibility mode.

v Yes

v No

Fixed Orientation This entry sets the default orientation to the upper leftcorner. Use this setting when printing legacy 3800 stylepage mode applications.

v Yes

v No

Simulate Color withGray

This entry allows the printer to print color print jobs usinggray tones.

v Yes

v No

Single-byte FontSmoothing

This entry is used for edge smoothing of raster single-bytefonts

v Yes

v No

Double-byte FontSmoothing

This entry is used for edge smoothing of double-byteraster fonts.

v Yes

v No

Suppress Off PageErrors

This entry sets the distance (in pels) to suppress off pageerrors. This will allow the job to print off the physical pagewithout errors and data can be lost. This is useful whenyou want to print jobs that are poorly defined andchanging the print job is not an option.

0 to 100 pels


Table 41. Settings for Printer Definition → PDL (continued)


Scale GOCA Lines Select Yes to scale GOCA line widths according to thescale-to-fit ratio when the GOCA mapping is set toscale-to-fit. Select No when you do not want to scaleGOCA line widths.

v Yes

v No


Table 42. Settings for Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Channels → Edit...


Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Channels → FICON

Note: Select Edit... or Install... to access the following items:Note: Channel adapters cannot be installed or uninstalled. If the adapter card is physically present on the printer

controller, the adapter is automatically logically installed.

Adapter Cards This entry specifies whether FICON Link A or B isinstalled. If more than one FICON adapter card isinstalled, you can select one or both adapters. Theadapter card can be installed to multiple LPDs.Note: Channel adapters cannot be installed or unistalled.If the adapter card is physically present on the printercontroller, the adapter is automatically installed.

v FICON Link A

v FICON Link B

Device Address This entry specifies the 2-digit hexadecimal channeladdress which includes the device address.

Notes:

1. In simplex mode, only one device address is required.

In dual simplex mode, each printer requires a uniquedevice address. Printer 1 requires an even number(for example, X'30'); Printer 2 requires the nextconsecutive number (for example, X'31').

2. The duplex system does not require a unique number.It can use either of the addresses used for dualsimplex Printer 1 or dual simplex Printer 2. However, itis often easier from an operational viewpoint to assignduplex a separate address (so the duplex and simplexprinters look like unique devices to the operatingsystem). The general convention in this case is toassign the duplex system the next consecutiveaddress (even) after the address for simplex Printer 2.

For example, if you define Printer 1 in dual simplex asX'30', you should then define Printer 2 in dual simplexas X'31', and, optionally, define the complete systemin duplex as X'32'.

3. The device addresses specified above must match thedevice addresses defined to the host PSF software,and in the case of S/390 hosts, the I/O devicedefinitions.

X'00' to X'FF' (Hexadecimalnotation)

Default is X'00'.

Multi-HostEnvironment Flag

This entry indicates whether a multiple hostprinter-sharing system exists. (Multi-Host Environmentsupport increases configuration flexibility and simplifiesoperational procedures for FICON-attached printers.)

Notes regarding FICON attachment:

v Do not enable this flag unless all hosts sharing theprinter have PSF ASSIGN/UNASSIGN support.

If these conditions are not satisfied, and Multi-HostEnvironment is enabled on the printer, PSF may not beable to access the printer.

v True

v False

Maximum BlockLength

The maximum size of data blocks sent to the printingsystem.

v 32K

v 64K


Table 42. Settings for Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Channels → Edit... (continued)


Media Speed(FICON Link A)

This entry specifies the maximum speed. If only oneadapter is installed, this field is called Media Speed andthis is active. If two adapters are installed, this field iscalled Media Speed FICON Link A and it is not activeunless Use Adapter A is selected.

v Autonegotiate

v 1 Gigabit

v 2 Gigabits

Media Speed FICONLink B

This entry specifies the maximum speed. If only oneadapter is installed, this field does not appear. If twoadapters are installed, this field is called Media SpeedFICON Link B and it is not active unless Use Adapter Bis selected.

v Autonegotiate

v 1 Gigabit

v 2 Gigabits

Priority This entry specifies the priority of print jobs from eachprinting interface. One is the highest priority. The highestpriority protocol are processed first.

1 to 10

Default is 5

Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Channels → ESCON

Note: Select Edit... or Install... to access the following items:Note: Channel adapters cannot be installed or uninstalled. If the adapter card is physically present on the printer

controller, the adapter is automatically logically installed.

Adapter Cards This entry specifies whether ESCON Link A or B isinstalled. If more than one ESCON adapter card isinstalled, you can select one or both adapters. Theadapter card can be installed to multiple LPDs.Note: Channel adapters cannot be installed or unistalled.If the adapter card is physically present on the printercontroller, the adapter is automatically installed.

v ESCON Link A

v ESCON Link B

Device Address This entry specifies the 2-digit hexadecimal channeladdress which includes the device address.

Notes:

1. In simplex mode, only one device address is required.

In dual simplex mode, each printer requires a uniquedevice address. Printer 1 requires an even number(for example, X'30'); Printer 2 requires the nextconsecutive number (for example, X'31').

2. The duplex system does not require a unique number.It can use either of the addresses used for dualsimplex Printer 1 or dual simplex Printer 2. However, itis often easier from an operational viewpoint to assignduplex a separate address (so the duplex and simplexprinters look like unique devices to the operatingsystem). The general convention in this case is toassign the duplex system the next consecutiveaddress (even) after the address for simplex Printer 2.

For example, if you define Printer 1 in dual simplex asX'30', you should then define Printer 2 in dual simplexas X'31', and, optionally, define the complete systemin duplex as X'32'.

3. The device addresses specified above must match thedevice addresses defined to the host PSF software,and in the case of S/390 hosts, the I/O devicedefinitions.

X'00' to X'FF' (Hexadecimalnotation)

Default is X'00'


Table 42. Settings for Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Channels → Edit... (continued)


Multi-HostEnvironment Flag

This entry indicates whether a multiple hostprinter-sharing system exists. (Multi-Host Environmentsupport increases configuration flexibility and simplifiesoperational procedures for ESCON-attached printers.)

Notes regarding ESCON attachment:

v Do not enable this flag unless all hosts sharing theprinter have PSF ASSIGN/UNASSIGN support.

If these conditions are not satisfied, and Multi-HostEnvironment is enabled on the printer, PSF may not beable to access the printer.

v True

v False

Maximum BlockLength

The maximum size of data blocks sent to the printingsystem.

v 32K

v 64K

Priority This entry specifies the priority of print jobs from eachprinting interface. One is the highest priority. The highestpriority protocol are processed first.

1 to 10

Default is 5


Table 43. Settings for Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Ethernet Adapters


Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Ethernet Adapters → Ethernet Copper Integrated #1

Note: Select Edit... or Install... to access the following items:

Primary This entry specifies whether the selected adapter is theprimary LAN adapter when multiple adapters are installed.

v Yes

v No

DHCP Addressing This entry specifies whether the printer sends DynamicHost Configuration Protocol (DHCP) requests to theserver to have an IP address assigned to the printer atbootup. The default setting is On. As part of the DHCPcommunication, the printer requests that the DHCP serverregister the printer's IP host name with the DNS server.

v Off - the printer does not send DHCP addressingrequests.

v On - the printer attempts to get IP addressing using theDHCP protocol.

Notes:

1. The printer requests that the DHCP server register theprinter host name with a DNS server.

2. The printer attempts to obtain information from aDHCP server up to the time limit specified in DHCPTime Out.

v On

v Off

DHCP Plug-and-Play This entry specifies if DHCP plug-and-play is enabled ordisabled.

Enabling plug-and-play causes the printer to requestseveral values from the DHCP server. The values theprinter requests include: Time Zone, and the addresses ofDNS, SMTP, Time, and SNTP servers.

The printer uses the values received from the DHCPserver to update its configuration. If no value is providedby the DHCP server, the respective value is null.

v Enable

v Disable

DHCP Time Out This entry specifies the number of seconds the printerwaits for responses from the DHCP server. A server willnormally respond in a few seconds. However, in networkconfigurations that include switches, a switch can blocknetwork activity to or from a new station during itsSpanning Tree checkout for a minute or more. During thistime the printer's DHCP broadcasts may be blocked bythe switch. Increasing the DHCP Timeout value allowsmore time for the printer retries to occur.

1 to 300

Default is 60

IP Address This entry specifies the Internet protocol (IP) address ofthe printer in dotted decimal format. Get this value fromyour LAN administrator. This value must match the IPaddress value in the host PSF configuration.

This value must be set for each configuration. Forexample, set it for simplex mode, dual simplex mode, andduplex mode.Note: This field is not available for editing when DHCPAddressing is On.

X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255


Table 43. Settings for Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Ethernet Adapters (continued)


Subnet Mask This entry specifies the mask that identifies the localsubnet in dotted decimal format. Get this value from yourLAN administrator.Note: This field is not available for editing when DHCPAddressing is On.


Internet Name ofLocal Host

If this field is left blank, the default host name will beused. To change the host name, type a new host nameinto this field.

IP Address ofPrimary andSecondary DNSServer

Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format for theprimary DNS server. A DNS server translates networknames into dotted decimal addresses.Note: This field is not available for editing when DHCPPlug-and-Play is Enabled.


Media Speed The Media Speed setting includes both the speed andduplex setting. The Media Speed setting of the printermust match the media speed and duplex setting of thelink partner (usually an Ethernet switch). If you havedifficulty getting a connection to work, make sure that boththe speed and duplex settings of the printer and the linkpartner are the same. For example, an Auto setting in theprinter may result in poor communication with a switchport that is set to 100-Full. In this case, set both theprinter and the switch to Auto or 100-Full.

v Auto Negotiation

v 10 Half Duplex

v 10 Full Duplex

v 100 Half Duplex

v 100 Full Duplex

Default GatewayAddress

This entry specifies the IP address of the default gatewayin dotted decimal format. Get this value from your LANadministrator.Note: This field is not available for editing when DHCPAddressing is On.


Domain Name ofLocal Host

Obtain the value for the Domain Name from your networkadministrator.Note: This field is not available for editing when DHCPAddressing is On.

X.X.X.X where X is analphanumeric character

Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Ethernet Adapters → Ethernet Copper NIC



v Yes

v No







Notes:



v On

v Off




v Enable

v Disable


1 to 300

Default is 60


This value is unique to a duplex system, and is the sameregardless of whether the printer is in duplex ordual-simplex mode.Note: This field is not available for editing when DHCPAddressing is On.













v Auto Negotiation

v 10 Half Duplex

v 10 Full Duplex

v 100 Half Duplex

v 100 Full Duplex







Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Ethernet Adapters → Ethernet Fiber NIC



v Yes

v No




Notes:



v On

v Off







v Enable

v Disable


1 to 300

Default is 60


This value is unique to a duplex system, and is the sameregardless of whether the printer is in duplex ordual-simplex mode.Note: This field is not available for editing when DHCPAddressing is On.










v Auto Negotiation

v 10 Half Duplex

v 10 Full Duplex

v 100 Half Duplex

v 100 Full Duplex










Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Ethernet Adapters → Ethernet Copper Integrated #2 (Service)



v Yes

v No

DHCP Addressing This field is not supported on the service adapter. A fixedIP address should be used.

DHCP Plug-and-Play This field is not supported on the service adapter. A fixedIP address should be used.

DHCP Time Out This field is not supported on the service adapter. A fixedIP address should be used.

IP Address For use by Service personnel only. X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255

Subnet Mask This entry specifies the mask that identifies the localsubnet in dotted decimal format. Get this value from yourLAN administrator.



This field is not supported on the service adapter.


This field is not supported on the service adapter.

Media Speed The Media Speed setting includes both the speed anduplex setting. The Media Speed setting of the printermust match the media speed an duplex setting of the linkpartner (usually an Ethernet switch). If you have difficultygetting a connection to work, make sure that both thespeed and duplex settings of the printer and the linkpartner are the same. For example, an Auto setting in theprinter may result in poor communication with a switchport that is set to 100-Full. In this case, set both theprinter and the switch to Auto or 100-Full.

v Auto Negotiation

v 10 Half Duplex

v 10 Full Duplex

v 100 Half Duplex

v 100 Full Duplex


This entry specifies the IP address of the default gatewayin dotted decimal format. Get this value from your LANadministrator.



Obtain the value for the Domain Name from your networkadministrator.



Table 44. Settings for Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Ethernet Protocols


Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Ethernet Protocols → IPDS TCP/IP


TCP Port This entry specifies the TCP socket address of theattachment.

Notes:

1. In dual simplex mode, each printer requires a uniqueport. If you use the default value of 5001 for simplexPrinter 1, Ricoh recommends using 5002 as the valuefor simplex Printer 2.

2. The duplex printing system must have a single uniqueport number. It can use either of the TCP portnumbers specified for simplex Printer 1 or simplexPrinter 2. However, it is often easier from anoperational viewpoint to assign duplex a separate TCPport number. If 5001 and 5002 are used for simplexPrinter 1 and simplex Printer 2, Ricoh recommendsthat the duplex system be assigned TCP port number5003.

3. The TCP Port numbers specified in the printerconfiguration must match the Port numbers assignedin the host PSF system.

5001 to 65535

Data Timeout This entry specifies the number of seconds the printerwaits for data before it determines there is no more datato receive for the job. The printer then ends the job andchecks other interfaces for new jobs. Valid values are 0 to300. Zero specifies an infinite timeout period, whereprinting is completely dependent on the host system toend the connection. Zero is the default for TCP protocols.

0 to 300 seconds

Default is 0 (infinite)

Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Ethernet Protocols → FTP (Service)


Data Timeout This entry specifies the number of seconds the printerwaits for data before it determines there is no more datato receive for the job. The printer then ends the job andchecks other interfaces for new jobs. Valid values are 0 to300. Zero specifies an infinite timeout period, whereprinting is completely dependent on the host system toend the connection.

0 to 300 seconds


Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Ethernet Protocols → Push Print (Service)


Data Timeout This entry specifies the number of seconds the printerwaits for data before it determines there is no more datato receive for the job. The printer then ends the job andchecks other interfaces for new jobs. Valid values are 0 to300. Zero specifies an infinite timeout period, whereprinting is completely dependent on the host system toend the connection.

0 to 300 seconds



Table 45. Settings for Printer Definition → Network → Remote Access


Printer Definition → Network → Remote Access → SNMP

Note: Select Edit... to access the following items:

SNMP AgentEnabled

Select Yes to allow (enable) any SNMP functions,including monitoring and Forward/Backward space control.

v Yes

v No

Allow to ConfigurePrinter

Select Yes to allow SNMP to configure the printer. v Yes

v No

SNMP Trap Host Enter the IP address of a trap host in dotted decimalformat.


SNMP CommunityName

See Table 48 on page 141. Alphanumeric characters

Printer Definition → Network → Remote Access → Online Access (Web Pages)


Online Access (WebPages) Enabled

Select Yes to allow (enable) InfoPrint 4100 Online Access(Web Pages) to access the printer.

v Yes

v No

Show Online AccessLog

Select Show Online Access Log to display the InfoPrint4100 Online Access (Web Pages) activity log.

Clear Online AccessLog

Select Clear Online Access Log to clear the InfoPrint4100 Online Access (Web Pages) activity log.

Printer Definition → Network → Remote Access → E-mail


E-mail Enabled Select Yes to enable e-mail notification so that informationabout certain printer conditions and internal traces may besent to support personnel using e-mail. If this combo boxis grayed out, make sure an Ethernet adapter is installed(Printer Definition -> Network -> Attachments).

v Yes

v No

Printer SuppliesE-mail Address

Specify the printer supplies e-mail address when sendingsupplies information. Multiple e-mail addresses must beseparated by a space.

Printer ProblemsE-mail Address

Specify the printer problems e-mail address when sendingproblem information. Multiple e-mail addresses must beseparated by a space.

Printer ServiceE-mail Address

Specify the printer service e-mail address when sendingservice information. Multiple e-mail addresses must beseparated by a space.

Default Trace E-mailDestination

Type in the e-mail address of the support person who willreceive trace data generated by the printer. This wouldnormally be a Ricoh support person. Trace informationcontains internal debug data that is used to diagnoseprinter problems. Trace information is sent as anattachment to the e-mail. Multiple e-mail addresses arenot allowed.


Table 45. Settings for Printer Definition → Network → Remote Access (continued)


SMTP Mail ServerHostname or IPAddress

Specifies the IP host name or the IP address of theSimple Mail Transport Protocol (SMTP) server. If a hostname is entered the printer will resolve the name to an IPaddress using the DNS server specified by the DNSentries. The printer sends e-mail it generates to thisserver. Select Show SMTP Log to access the SMTPserver connection log, which may be useful for debugginge-mail notification problems.Note: This field is not available for editing when DHCPPlug-and-play is enabled. When DHCP Plug-and-Play isenabled, the printer requests the address of the SMTPmail server from the DHCP server.

SMTP Timeout Specifies the timeout value when the printer sends e-mailto the SMTP server. If a timeout occurs, the current e-mailmessage is cancelled.

0 to 999

Printer Definition → Network → Remote Access → Telnet 3270


Telnet 3270 Enabled Select Yes to enable Telnet 3270 access to the hostsystem. Enabling Telnet 3270 creates a new button calledTelnet 3270 Terminal on the Frequent Tasks -> RemoteTerminals screen.

v Yes

v No

Telnet3270Hostname or IPAddress

Specifies the Hostname or IP address of the host for the3270 Telnet terminal. This allows remote control of thehost system from the printer Operator Console via aTelnet session.

Alphanumeric characters



Telnet 5250 Enabled Select Yes to enable Telnet 5250 access to the hostsystem. Enabling Telnet 5250 creates a new button calledTelnet 5250 Terminal on the Frequent Tasks -> RemoteTerminals screen.

v Yes

v No

Telnet 5250Hostname or IPAddress

Specifies the Hostname or IP address of the host for the5250 Telnet terminal. This allows remote control of thehost system from the printer Operator Console via aTelnet session.


Printer Definition → Network → Remote Access → InfoPrint Process Director (IPPD)


IPPD Enabled Select Yes to enable IPPD access to the host system.Enabling IPPD creates a new button called InfoPrintProcess Director on the Frequent Tasks -> RemoteTerminals screen.

v Yes

v No

URL for IPPDApplication

Specifies the URL address of the IPPD Application. Thisallows remote access to the IPPD application on the hostsystem within a window on the printer Operator Console.


Printer Definition → Network → Remote Access → PRSCD


PRSCD E-mailAddress

Specify the e–mail address where the Printer ReportedService and Configuration Data will be sent when theSend PRSCD E-mail button is selected.

v No

v Yes


Table 46. Settings for Printer Definition → Network → Restricted Access


Printer Definition → Network → Restricted Access

Print Jobs Defines whether IP address restrictions apply to print jobs.If restricted, jobs originating from IP addresses outside therestricted ranges are not accepted. If unrestricted, thisfunction can be accessed from any originating IP address.

v Unrestricted

v Restricted

Online Access (WebPages)

Defines whether IP address restrictions apply to accessesby Online Access (Web Pages). If restricted, OnlineAccess accesses originating from IP addresses outsidethe restricted ranges are ignored.

v Unrestricted

v Restricted

SNMP Defines whether IP address restrictions apply to SNMPclient accesses. If restricted, SNMP client accessesoriginating from IP addresses outside the restricted rangesare ignored. If unrestricted, this function can be accessedfrom any originating IP address.

v Unrestricted

v Restricted

Productivity TrackingFeature

Defines whether IP address restrictions apply to theProductivity Tracking Feature client accesses. If restricted,the Productivity Tracking Feature client accessesoriginating from IP addresses outside the restricted rangesare ignored. If unrestricted, this function can be accessedfrom any originating IP address.

v Unrestricted

v Restricted

Note: Select Edit Ranges... to access the following items:

v Inactive

v Active

These entries allow you to make the specified IP addressranges active. Multiple IP address ranges can becombined to control access to the restricted functions.Select Active for each IP address range to include therange in the set of addresses that are allowed to accessthe restricted functions.

Examples:

v If you restrict SNMP to IP address ranges 10.1.1.1through 10.1.1.5, only SNMP client accesses thatoriginate from an address in that address range will beallowed.

v If you restrict Print Jobs to only one IP address(specify the range as 10.1.1.1 through 10.1.1.1), onlyprint jobs that originate from that IP address will beaccepted.

v Inactive

v Active


Table 47. Settings for Printer Definition → Pre/Postprocessing


Printer Definition → Pre/Postprocessing → Pre/Postprocessing

Note: Select New... to access the following items:

New Device Name Type in up the name of the pre/postprocessing device youhave defined.

Up to 12 alphanumeric characters

New Device Type Select the device type. v Coupled Preprocessor

v Coupled Postprocessor

v Advanced Postprocessor -MICR

v Advanced Postprocessor - BarCode Checking

v UP3I Sequence

Printer Definition → Pre/Postprocessing → Postprocessing Options

Use Internal Stacker‡

This entry indicates whether an internal stacker is enabled(InfoPrint Models MS1, HS2, MD1/2, and HD3/4 only). Asetting of Yes enables the internal stacker if there are noother enabled postprocessing devices (either UP3I ornon-UP3I). For InfoPrint Models MS1, HS2, MD1/2, andHD3/4, the following apply:

1. An internal stacker must be installed (Feature Code4770).

2. The printer mode must be set to Simplex (PrinterDefinition → Printer → Basic → Printer Mode).

3. The printer speed must be set to Low (PrinterDefinition → Printer → Basic → Printer Speed).(Models HS2 and HD3/4 only)


v Yes

v No

Offsetter Enabled ‡ This entry indicates whether an installed offsetterpostprocessing device is to be used. The host system willsend “Alternate Offset Stacker” commands if the offsetteris enabled and the print job contains these commands


v Yes

v No

BTS Enabled ‡ This entry indicates whether an installed Burster/TrimmerStacker (BTS) postprocessing device is being used. Thehost system will not send eject-to-front-facing commandsif the BTS is enabled.


v Yes

v No

Offset on MarkForms ‡

If Yes is selected, offset commands are sent to anenabled postprocessor only for pages that contain MarkForms. Any “Alternate Offset Stacker” commands that aresent from the host are ignored.


v Yes

v No

Printer Definition → Pre/Postprocessing → UP3I Devices

Note: Select Edit UP3I Devices... to access the following items:


Table 47. Settings for Printer Definition → Pre/Postprocessing (continued)


UP3I Device Name Use this entry to change the UP3I device that you want toview or edit. The name you enter will override the namecommunicated over the UP3I network with one that ismore appropriate for your installation.

Distance Specifies the approximate distance (in inches) betweenthis postprocessor and the printer in inches.


Table 48. SNMP Community Names

Community Name Value Description Value Options

public This is a standard community. v Read

v Write

ibmpsc_admin This is the default community nameused by InfoPrint network printmanagement tools.

v Read

v Write

ibmpsc_job This is the default community nameused by InfoPrint network print jobmonitoring tools.

v Read

v Write

Access This entry is set for each SNMPcommunity name.

v Read

v Write

v None


Defining AdaptersThis procedure lets you view or edit the adapter settings of an installed adapter.

The following adapters are available:

v Ethernet Copper Integrated #1

v Ethernet Copper Integrated #2 (Service)

v Ethernet Fiber NIC

v Ethernet Copper NIC

v FICON Link A | Link B

v ESCON Link A | Link B

Before you install an adapter or change a definition value for an adapter, please review the configurationsettings for the type of adapter you are changing (see the table of printer definition items beginning on129).

Before you print the adapter configuration, ensure that all IPDS protocols are disabled. See “Enabling andDisabling Protocols” in the Operator's Guide for more information. You do not need to disable IPDSprotocols if you are viewing or changing the configuration.

Defining AdaptersPrinter Definition → Network → Attachments → Ethernet Fiber or Copper Integrated #1 | EthernetFiber or Copper Integrated #2 | Ethernet Fiber NIC, slot n | Ethernet Copper NIC, slot n |FICON Link A, slot n| FICON Link B, slot n| ESCON Link A, slot n | ESCON Link B, slot n

NoteSelecting Restart may be required in these cases:

v Certain configuration items require a Restart for a change in the parameter to take effect. If aRestart is required, a console message will notify you.

v All FICON, ESCON, and Resource Utilization configurations require restarting both printers indual-simplex mode.

Configuring AdaptersTo view adapter settings, select Printer Definition → Network → Attachments.

To change adapter settings:

1. Disable the associated protocol on the Manage Protocols panel (Frequent Tasks → ManageProtocols).

2. Select the adapter you want to configure on the Network - Adapters panel (Printer Definition →Network → Attachments) and select Edit....

3. Enter your configuration settings.


5. Follow any instructions given after selecting OK.

6. Enable the associated protocol on the Manage Protocols panel (Frequent Tasks → ManageProtocols)



Defining ProtocolsThis procedure lets you view or edit the protocol settings for an installed adapter.

The following protocols are available:

v FICON for channel adapters

v ESCON for channel adapters

v IPDS TCP/IP for Ethernet adapters

v FTP (Service) for Ethernet adapters

v Push Print (Service) for Ethernet adapters

Before you install a protocol or change a definition value for an protocol, please review the configurationsettings for the type of protocol you are changing (see the table of printer definition items beginning on135).

Before you print the protocol configuration, ensure that all IPDS protocols are disabled. See “Enabling andDisabling Protocols” in the Operator's Guide for more information. You do not need to disable IPDSprotocols if you are viewing or changing the configuration.

Defining ProtocolsPrinter Definition → Network → Attachments → Ethernet Protocols → IPDS TCP/IP | FTP | PUSHPRINT

Configuring ProtocolsYou must stop the printer before making configuration changes. To view protocol settings, select PrinterDefinition → Network → Attachments.

To change protocol settings:

1. Disable the protocol on the Manage Protocols panel (Frequent Tasks → Manage Protocols).

2. Select the protocol you want to configure on the Network - Attachments panel (Printer Definition →Network → Attachments).

Note: The appropriate adapter for the protocol you want to configure must be installed and enabled.Use the Network - Attachments panel (Printer Definition → Network → Attachments) toconfigure the appropriate adapter.

3. Enter your configuration settings.



6. Enable the protocol on the Manage Protocols panel (Frequent Tasks → Manage Protocols).



Defining Remote AccessThese procedures let you enable and define remote access to the printer for both SNMP and E-mail,access to the Host computer from the printer via Telnet 3270 and 5250 sessions, and access to InfoPrintProcess Director on the Host computer from the printer.

Defining Remote AccessPrinter Definition → Network → Remote Access → SNMP | Online Access| E-mail | PRSCD |Telnet 3270 | Telnet 5250 | InfoPrint Process Director (IPPD)

Configuring Remote Access for SNMPThe printer can be accessed remotely by SNMP. To view remote access settings, select Printer Definition→ Network → Remote Access and select SNMP from the list.

To change remote access settings for SNMP:

1. Select SNMP Agent Enabled.

2. Enter Yes to enable SNMP or No to disable it.



The following industry standard SNMP MIBs are supported by the printer:

v Printer MIB v2 (RFC 3805, follow-on to RFC 1759)

v Host Resources (RFC 1514)

v MIB-2 (RFC 1213)

The ANSI files for these MIBs may be downloaded from many internet sites. They are also available onthe InfoPrint 4100 User Information CD.

Configuring Remote Access for Online Access (Web Pages)The printer can be accessed remotely using the InfoPrint 4100 Online Access (Web Pages). To viewremote access settings, select Printer Definition → Network → Remote Access and select Online Access(Web Pages) from the list.

To change remote access settings for Online Access:

1. Select Online Access (Web Pages) Enabled.

2. Enter Yes to enable Online Access or No to disable it.

Note: The Online Access field is displayed only if the user has Online Access Authority, which isdefined on the Logon - Manage Users window on the printer console.



Optionally, you may choose to view the Online Access (Web Pages) activity log by selecting Show OnlineAccess Log or to clear it by selecting Clear Online Access Log

Configuring Remote Access for E-mailSeveral functions within the printer may send information to an e-mail address. These include E-mailnotification, Traces, PRSCD data. The printer must be configured for outgoing e-mail in order for thesefunctions to use the e-mail interface.


To configure the printer for outgoing e-mail, enter the name or IP address of the SMTP (Simple MainTransport Protocol) server for your network. This may be provided by your network administrator. If youenter this as a name (the typical case), then you must also enter the IP addresses of the DNS (DomainName Server) for your network. The DNS values are entered on the Edit window for the primary adapteron the Network - Adapters panel (Printer Definition → Network → Adapters → Edit).

Notes:

1. An Ethernet adapter must be configured and logically installed before you can use e-mail notification.

2. After configuring the printer for outgoing e-mail notification, you can select to save traces when aproblem occurs and then you can e-mail the trace data to the selected mail destination.

3. After configuring the printer for e-mail, you may send the PRSCD log by e-mail.

To configure the printer so that you can e-mail trace data to a specified mail destination, you must specifye-mail settings as follows:

1. Select Printer Definition → Network → Remote Access.

2. Select E-mail from the list.

3. Select Yes for E-mail Enabled.

4. Check with your LAN administrator for the correct settings and enter those settings for each of thefollowing fields:

v SMTP Mail Server Hostname or IP Address

v IP Address of Name Server

5. You can change the default by entering a different name in Default Trace E-mail Destination. Allnames that you enter here can be selected from a drop-down list when you select to e-mail the tracedata.


Configuring Remote Access for PRSCD (Printer Reported Service andConfiguration Data)The printer collects internal configuration data, called PRSCD (Printer Reported Service and ConfigurationData) log. This configuration data is useful for servicing the printer. The log may be viewed at the consoleor sent to a user by e-mail.

You may send the PRSCD log to a user of your choice. Type the e-mail address where you want to sendthe log and select Send PRSCD E-mail.

Note: The Remote-Access for E-mail function must be configured for the PRSCD e-mail operation towork. Refer to the “Configuring Remote Access for E-mail” on page 144 for more information.

Configuring Remote Access to Host using Telnet 3270The printer can access the host remotely using InfoPrint 4100 Telnet 3270 remote access. To view remoteaccess settings, select Printer Definition → Network → Remote Access and select Telnet 3270 from thelist.

To change remote access settings for Telnet 3270:

1. Select Edit.

2. Select Yes to enable Telnet 3270 No to disable it.

3. Check with your LAN administrator and enter the correct settings for Telnet 3270 Hostname or IPAddress.



Configuring Remote Access to Host using Telnet 5250The printer can access the host remotely using InfoPrint 4100 Telnet 5250 remote access. To view remoteaccess settings, select Printer Definition → Network → Remote Access and select Telnet 5250 from thelist.

To change remote access settings for Telnet 5250:

1. Select Edit.

2. Select Yes to enable Telnet 5250 No to disable it.

3. Check with your LAN administrator and enter the correct settings for Telnet 5250 Hostname or IPAddress.


Configuring Remote Access to InfoPrint Process Director (IPPD) onthe HostThe printer can access host IPPD remotely using InfoPrint 4100 IPPD remote access. To view remoteaccess settings, select Printer Definition → Network → Remote Access and select InfoPrint ProcessDirector (IPPD) from the list.

To change remote access settings for InfoPrint Process Director (IPPD):

1. Select Edit.

2. Select Yes to enable access to InfoPrint Process Director (IPPD) on the host No to disable it.

3. Check with your LAN administrator and enter the correct URL for URL for IPPD Application.



Troubleshooting LAN Connectivity and LAN Communication ProblemsIf you are having problems getting the printer to communicate over Ethernet, use the Network - RemoteAccess Status panel to check the status of the Ethernet adapters that are in the installed state. SelectPrinter Definition → Network → Status → LAN Status... to display the Network - Remote Access Statuspanel for LAN attachments.

v If the Actual Speed/Duplex value does not match the Desired Speed/Duplex value, you may have theprinter’s configuration set to a value that is incompatible with the Ethernet switch to which the printer isconnected. The speed and duplex setting of the printer must be set to the same value as the switch.For example, if you set the printer for Auto, the switch port must also be set for Auto; if you set theprinter for 100 Full duplex, then the switch port must also be set to 100 Full duplex.

v If the link is inactive, then check the Speed/Duplex setting. Also check the RJ45 cable connections atboth ends of the Ethernet cable (the connection at the printer and the connection to the wall or switchport).

v If the link is active and working correctly you will normally see the count of Octets Received andPackets Received change every few seconds. If the link is active but you do not see any numberschanging, the printer’s network configuration parameters may not be set correctly, or the Ethernet switchmay not be configured correctly. Check the printer’s IP addressing information to be sure it is correct. Ifthese values are correct, contact your network administrator for further assistance.

If you are using InfoPrint Manager to communicate with the printer and the printer does not seem torespond quickly (within about 5 seconds) to InfoPrint Manager printer-pause or job-cancel requests, usethe Network - Remote Status panel to check the SNMP status. Select Printer Definition → Network →Status → Remote Access Status... to display the Network - Remote Access Status panel for SNMPstatus.

v If SNMP status is Not Running, use the Network - Remote Access panel to set remote access settingsfor SNMP. Select Printer Definition → Network → Remote Access and select SNMP from the list.Select the Edit... button and set SNMP Agent Enabled to Yes and Allow to Configure Printer to Yes.

v Check IPDS Fast Path. A status line that says “No Request Received” or shows a timestamp that is old(the time is shown as local time) means that the printer has not received any Fast Path requests fromthe InfoPrint Manager system. This may be caused by a firewall in the network path (between theInfoPrint Manager system and the printer) that does not pass SNMP packets. Contact your networkadministrator for further assistance.

Note: InfoPrint Manager attempts to use SNMP to obtain fast printer response for pause and canceleven when the InfoPrint Manager printer icon has SNMP set to Disabled.

If you have configured the printer to automatically send e-mail for printer status changes, but the specifiede-mail recipient is not receiving notifications by e-mail, use the Network - Remote Access Status panel todetermine the status of the e-mail function in the printer. Select Printer Definition → Network → Status →Remote Access Status... to display the Network - Remote Access Status panel for E-mail status.

v If E-mail status is Disabled, use the Network - Remote Access panel to set remote access settings fore-mail. Select Printer Definition → Network → Remote Access and select E-mail from the list. Selectthe Edit... button and set E-mail Enabled to Yes and set the SMTP Mail Server Hostname or IPAddress for your installation. Contact your network administrator for the address of the mail server foryour installation.

v If E-mail status is Running, check the e-mail address of notifications that you specified on the e-mailpanel. Select Printer Definition → Network → Remote Access and select E-mail from the list. Selectthe Edit... button and check the e-mail settings for notifications. If this is correct, press the Show SMTPLog button and check the log for errors. The log shows the interaction between the printer’s SMTPclient and the SMTP server.

v Check MRPD status. It will show the last time that an attempt to send the MRPD data by FTP wasattempted, and the last time that an FTP transfer was successful. The time is shown as local time. Theautomatic transfer is done once per day. To force MRPD to immediately attempt an FTP transfer, select


Printer Definition → Network → Remote Access and select MRPD from the list. Select the Edit...button and the Show MRPD Log button. This attempts an FTP transfer and shows the log. Return tothe Network - Remote Access Status panel and check MRPD status again. An unsuccessful transfermay be caused by a local firewall that does not allow FTP traffic. Contact your network administrator forfurther assistance.

If you are trying to display the printer’s Online Access (Web Pages) with a web browser and the printerdoes not seem to respond, use the Network - Remote Access Status panel to check the status of theprinter’s web server. Select Printer Definition → Network → Status → Remote Access Status... to displayOnline Access status.

v If Online Access is Not Running, select Printer Definition → Network → Remote Access and selectOnline Access from the list. Select the Edit... button and set Online Access Enabled to Yes. Theinability to display the printer's Online Access web pages on a remote system may be caused by afirewall in the network path (between the remote system and the printer) that does not pass SNMPpackets. Contact your network administrator for further assistance.


Defining Interfaces and Preprocessing or Postprocessing Devices

Options for Simplex and Duplex ModelsInfoPrint 4100 models can have up to four pre/postprocessing device interfaces per engine. Port 1 in eachprinter has an interface adaptor installed as a standard feature that may used either for a preprocessing orpostprocessing device (hereafter called Pre/Post).

Up to three additional optional Pre/Post device interface adaptors may be installed in Ports 2, 3, and 4 ofeach printer. Allowable combinations for each printer are shown in Table 49.

Note: The Forms Identification feature (FC 4464) uses a port in Printer 1 and could use an additional portin Printer 2 if you are printing in dual simplex mode.

Table 49. Preprocessing/postprocessing interface options

Port Configuration Options

1 Pre/Post Pre/Post Pre/Post Pre/Post

2 — Pre/Post Pre/post Pre/post

3 — — Pre/Post Pre/Post

4 — — — Pre/Post



Chapter 8. Establishing Form Settings

Setting form valuesForms → Form Settings

Before you can print forms, you must establish settings for the form or determine which of the defaultforms settings already established (Snapshots) match the forms you intend to use.

You must identify all forms used in the printer before you can complete the form-loading procedure. Youcan identify and store forms before you attempt to load them into the printer, or you can identify and storethem while you load them. Identify forms with the values for the settings described in Table 51 on page152.

Once you identify and save the form settings in a Snapshot, all future uses of that form need only identifythe Snapshot name during the loading procedure.

Table 50 shows the default read only Snapshots that are established in the printer at the factory.

Table 50. Default Snapshots

Snapshot Name Description-Length x Width

InfoPrint-2up Letter 2–Up Letter - 11.0 in. x 18.0 in.

InfoPrint-2up Letter Tractorless 2–Up Letter (Tractorless) - 11.0 in. x 17.0 in.

InfoPrint-2up A4 2-Up A4 - 296.3 mm x 445.0 mm

InfoPrint-2up A4 Tractorless 2-Up A4 (Tractorless) - 296.3 mm x 432.0 mm

Letter Letter - 8.5 in x 12.0 in

Legal Legal - 8.5 in x 15.0 in

Ledger Ledger - 11.0 in x 18.0 in

A3 A3 - 296.3 mm x 445.0 mm

Standard Standard - 11.0 in x 15.0 in

Table 51 on page 152 describes the required form settings and the values you can enter for a form.

151

Table 51. Settings for Forms → Form Settings

Setting Description Value Options

Forms → Form Settings

Length Specify the length dimension of the printed output asmeasured in the process direction (parallel to the tractorholes). You can specify this dimension in millimeters orinches and in lengths from 76 to 432 millimeters (3 to 17in.).

Specify the length either in millimeters as a whole numberor in inches to two decimal places. The printer rounds tothe nearest ¹/₆ inch the length you enter and displays iton the screen.Note: You can define forms lengths up to 54 inches if theSignature Page feature (FC 4554) has been installedNote: Any of these features can affect performance.

For related information, see “Valid Form Lengths inInches” on page 107.


See “System Characteristics” onpage 2 for detailed informationabout minimum and maximumlengths for each model.

Width Specify the total physical form widths (including the0.5-inch tractor hole carrier strips on either side of theform). For information about the form widths supported bydifferent printer models, see “System Characteristics” onpage 2.

When you enter a value in inches, use a decimal forfractional dimensions (for example, 13.5). When you entera value in millimeters, do not use a decimal point (usewhole numbers only).


See “System Characteristics” onpage 2 for detailed informationabout minimum and maximumwidths for each model.

Units This entry is for both Width and Length.


v Inches

v Millimeters

IPDS Form Name This entry must be a unique identifier.

Note: This field is case sensitive.


12 characters maximum


Table 51. Settings for Forms → Form Settings (continued)


IPDS Host Setup ID This entry is defined by your company to tell the hostsystem if the form loaded in the printer is the correct formfor the print job being sent to the printer. The host systemchecks the form loaded in the printer and compares theform definition in the Host Setup ID.

If the loaded form is the form required by the Host SetupID, the job is sent to the printer. If the loaded form is notthe form required by the Host Setup ID, an error messageis posted on the host system console.

Use 0 if no checking is to be done.


0 to 65535

Form Bar Code This entry is used to specify the alphanumeric value of abar code preprinted on special forms. These forms requirethe installation of the Forms Identification feature (FC4464).

Use 0000 for all forms that do not have a preprinted barcode.


0000 to FFFF

Tractorless Select Tractorless if you are using paper without tractorstrips.Select Tractored if you are using paper with tractor stripsand using tractorled mode.Select Tractorless (Tractored Forms) if you are usingpaper with tractor strips using tractorless mode.Tractorless mode is entered by pressing the blue buttonand moving the front tractors to the front of the printer.


v Tractored

v Tractorless

v Tractorless (Tractored Mode)

Chapter 8. Establishing Form Settings 153

|||||||||

||

|

|

|

Table 51. Settings for Forms → Form Settings (continued)


Marks This entry specifies the toner mark position in reference tothe top of the form (for tractorless forms only).Note:

Earlier versions of the AFCCU microcode did not providea separate Marks parameter, but did provide the followingsettings for the Tractorless parameter:

v No

v Yes: Print marks

v Yes: Marks are on the page

v Yes: Both

Table 52 shows how Snapshots containing Tractorlesssettings (from earlier microcode that did not provide aMarks parameter) are migrated to the newer microcodethat provides both the Tractorless and Marksparameters.


v Set Print registration mark forPrinter 1 to Yes if you wantPrinter 1 to print a registrationmark, which is typically read byPrinter 2.

v Set Print registration mark forPrinter 2 to Yes if you wantPrinter 2 to print a registrationmark, which is sometimesrequired by post processingequipment.

v Set Preprinted registrationmarks to Yes for Printer 1 ifthe form that you are using hasa preprinted registration markon the page for registeringprinter 1.

v Set Preprinted registrationmarks to Yes for Printer 2 ifthe form that you are using hasa preprinted registration markon the page for registeringprinter 2.

Commercial Print This entry indicates if 9pt forms are loaded in the printer.Note: This field is only displayed if Version 7 toner and ahard hot roll are installed.


Enable

v Yes

v No

Oversize Paper This entry indicates whether printing is to extend into eachcarrier strip 3.8 mm (0.15 in.). Selecting Yes also turns offany other printing in the carrier strips, including copy editmarks.


v Yes

v No

Paper Weight This entry indicates to the printer the weight of the formyou are defining. This enables the printer to compensatefor the form weight during printing.


v < 75 gsm (< 20 pounds)

v 75 - 98 gsm (20 - 26 pounds)

v > 98 gsm (>26 pounds)

Table 52. Migration of Snapshot settings for the Tractorless and Marks parameters

Tractorless setting (earlier microcodewithout the Marks parameter)

Tractorless and Marks settings (when Snapshots are migratedfrom earlier microcode without the Marks parameter)

No v Tractorless = No

v Print registration mark for Printer 1 = Yes

v Print registration mark for Printer 2 = No

v Preprinted registration marks for Printer 1 = No



||||

||

|

|

|

Table 52. Migration of Snapshot settings for the Tractorless and Marks parameters (continued)

Tractorless setting (earlier microcodewithout the Marks parameter)

Tractorless and Marks settings (when Snapshots are migratedfrom earlier microcode without the Marks parameter)

Yes: Print marks v Tractorless = Yes





Yes: Marks are on the page v Tractorless = Yes



v Preprinted registration marks for Printer 1 = Yes


Yes: Both v Tractorless = Yes



v Preprinted registration marks for Printer 1 = Yes


Chapter 8. Establishing Form Settings 155


Chapter 9. Creating and Copying Snapshots

This section describes how:

v Create and save Snapshots

v Edit values in individual or multiple Snapshots

v Save print quality settings to Snapshots

v Copy Snapshots between printer controllers

Snapshots allow you to "take a picture" of some of the essential printer configuration items that you set inthe Printer Definition panels and the form settings that you specify in the Form Settings panels. Snapshotsallow you to save printer and form settings that you may use frequently in your environment. Table 53 onpage 158 shows the settings that are saved in a Snapshot.

Creating or updating a Snapshot involves setting values for a form and setting other printer definitionvalues, including values for print quality, basic printer definitions, registration, and pre/postprocessing.Table 53 on page 158 lists the values that you see in a snapshot.

157

Table 53. Snapshot values

Forms → FormSettings

Forms → PrintRegistration

PrinterDefinition →Print Quality

PrinterDefinition →Printer → Basic

PrinterDefinition→Printer→Setup

PrinterDefinition→PDL→ IPDS

PrinterDefinition →Pre/Post-processing →Post-processingOptions

v Length

v Width

v Unit ofmeasure forlength andwidth

v IPDS - FormName

v IPDS - HostSetup ID

v Form BarCode

v Form typeTractored,Tractorless, orTractorless(TractoredForms)

v OversizePaper

v Paper Weight

v RegistrationMarks

– PrinterReg Marks

– TOF Offset

v CommercialPrint

v Paper FeedDirection forPrinter 2

v Paper FeedDirection forPrinter 1

v AcrossPaper FeedDirection forPrinter 2

v AcrossPaper FeedDirection forPrinter 1

v Contrast

v Boldness

v PreheatTemperature

v FuserTemperature

v Oil Rate

v Oil Belt

v Advanced...

– UseBackupIdler Roll

– PreheatOffset(see note1)

– FuserStartupBoost

– LowerTensionArmPressure

– LowerTensionArmStartupTiming

– Urge UnitDrive RollControl

v Printer Speed

v Front SheetSequence

v Eject to FrontFacing

v Auto NPROat EOF

v JamRecoveryPointDistance

v Hot RollType

v CutsheetEmulation

v ReprintPages afterJams

v IPDSResolution

v IPDSPrintheadResolution

v UseInternalStacker(see note2)

v OffsetterEnabled

v BTSEnabled

v Offset onMarkForms

Notes:

1. The preheat offset is a Service only value.

2. The internal stacker is available for InfoPrint 4100 Models MS1, HS2, MD1/2, HD3/4, TS1, TS2, TD1/2, andTD3/4 with Feature Code 4770/4771.

Snapshots affect how the print job is printed. You can create and save your own Snapshot using thedefault Snapshots as a template. And you can select and load a specific Snapshot when you want to printa job that has the same requirements as those specified in a particular Snapshot. You can also makechanges to your Snapshots and save them on your printer. You can view the Snapshot settings byselecting the Show Details... button on the Snapshots panel.

Note: Your Customer Support Specialist can specify whether to save all the following configurationsettings or to save only form settings in a Snapshot using the Snapshot Mode field in the Printer -Setup panel (Printer Definition → Printer → Setup).


||||||

||

|||

||||

|||||

|||

||

Notes:

1. Loading snapshots changes the printer configuration.

2. Printer configuration changes cause Negative Acknowlegements (NACKs) to the host.

3. The host will reprint any pages that need to be reprinted due to configuration changes.

Creating and saving SnapshotsBefore saving a Snapshot, you should review all printer and forms settings that are saved to Snapshots.Use Table 53 on page 158 to see which values are saved and where those values are defined on theconsole touch panels.

Do this procedure to create and save a Snapshot:

1. Select the Snapshots panel (Frequent Tasks → Snapshots).

2. Select Show Details... and review the values for the currently loaded Snapshot. These values will besaved to the Snapshot you are creating.

3. If you want to make changes to the printer and forms settings, use Table 53 on page 158 to find thepanel where that value is defined.

4. Navigate to each of the following touch panels and review or change the values that are saved toSnapshots:

v Select the Forms Settings panel (Forms → Forms Settings). and review or change the formsvalues you want to save to the Snapshot.

v Select the Print Quality panel (Printer Definition → Print Quality) and review or change the printquality values you want to save to the Snapshot. See “Saving Print Quality Settings to a Snapshot”on page 160 for more information about saving print quality values.

v Select the Printer - Basic panel (Printer Definition → Printer → Basic) and review or change thebasic printer settings you want to save to the Snapshot.

v Select the Pre/Postprocessing - Postprocessing Options panel (Printer Definition →Pre/Postprocessing → Postprocessing Options) to review or change the postprocessing settingsyou want to save to the Snapshot.

5. Review the printer definition settings on these panels:

v Print Registration panel (Forms → Print Registration)

v Printer - Setup panel (Printer Definition → Printer → Setup)

v PDL - IPDS panel (Printer Definition → PDL → IPDS)


7. Select Save current settings as... to save the Snapshot using the current settings for printer andforms.

8. Enter a name for the new Snapshot.

9. Select OK.

10. Select Close to return to the Main panel.

Editing multiple SnapshotsBefore changing values in a Snapshot and saving the changed Snapshot, you should review all printer andforms settings that are saved to Snapshots. Use Table 53 on page 158 to see which values are saved andwhere those values are defined on the console touch panels.

Do this procedure to edit the values saved in Snapshots:

1. Before making changes to your Snapshot settings, you should consider whether to save the currentsettings. Do the following to create a backup copy of your current Snapshot settings:

a. Plug the USB flash memory device into the InfoPrint Controller keyboard.

Chapter 9. Creating and Copying Snapshots 159

b. Select Maintenance → Backup and Recovery to display the Backup and Recovery panel.

c. Select Create Backup to copy the Snapshots file (config.bak) to the USB flash memory device.

d. Remove the USB flash memory device from the printer keyboard.


3. Select the wrench to open the Edit Snapshot window. From this window you can change values forone or more Snapshot settings and you can save your changed settings.

a. Select a cell in one or more Snapshots for the setting you want to change. When selecting cells inmore than one Snapshot, press and hold the CTRL key while selecting the cell in each of thedesired Snapshots.

b. Select Edit... to open the editing window for the selected setting.

c. Select or type the new value and select OK to save your change.


Saving Print Quality Settings to a SnapshotDo this procedure to save a Snapshot that contains your changed print quality settings. You can save yoursettings to a new Snapshot or change an existing one that you want to use for checking print qualitysettings.

1. Select the Forms Settings panel (Forms → Forms Settings). Select the paper weight range for thepaper you are printing.

2. Select the Print Quality panel (Printer Definition → Print Quality). In the Recommended Settingsfield, select the appropriate range for the paper weight you selected in the Forms Settings panel. Thissets the print quality settings to the optimal values based on the paper weight you selected and thetoner installed in your printer.

3. Run some print samples using these settings.

4. If you need to adjust the print quality settings after running the print samples, select the Print Qualitypanel (Printer Definition → Print Quality) and review the current print quality settings. See“Understanding Print Quality” for more information about setting print quality values.

5. Select the Snapshots panel (Frequent Tasks → Snapshots) and make sure that all printer and formssettings are set the way you want them. See “Creating and saving Snapshots” on page 159 for moreinformation.

6. Select Save current settings as.... You will be prompted to enter the name of the Snapshot you wantto save. The Name field will be filled in with the previously saved Snapshot. You can save it with thatname or specify a new name.


Understanding Print QualityPrint quality settings are defined on the Print Quality panel (Printer Definition → Print Quality). Youshould carefully review the current print quality settings before saving them to a Snapshot.


v Contrast - Adjust this setting by selecting the + or - button to increase or decrease the value by oneunit. The default value is 4.

Contrast determines how much toner coverage is being applied to the page. If you want darker logos,pictures, or bar codes, you might have to increase the contrast. If you are printing mostly text, thecontrast can usually be decreased. The higher the contrast is set, the more toner is used.

The contrast setting has little effect on the readability of small fonts or the appearance of grayscale orhalftones. These are adjusted by the boldness setting.

v Boldness - Adjust this setting by selecting the + or - button to increase or decrease the value by oneunit. The default value is 50. Values greater than 85 or less than 15 will turn the scroll bar red,indicating that you are reaching the high end or the low end of adjustment.

Boldness determines the look of the characters as well as the amount of haltone or grayscale thatappears on a page. If a small font appears hard to read, increasing the boldness may fix the problem. Ifa haltone or grayscale is too dark, decreasing the boldness may improve the look.

Changing the boldness will not significantly affect the amount of toner fill desired on the page.

g5au

d205

FrequentTasks

Forms MaintenancePrinter

DefinitionLogon...

Printer2 Printer1

NPROStart Stop Check/Reset Shut Down

Set PrintRegistration

1

0

0

0

0

0

4

2

20

20

20

20

3 5 6

60

60

60

60

80

80

80

80

100

100

100

100

100

7

40

40

40

40

A A50

HelpCancelOK

1

0

0

0

0

0

4

2

20

20

20

20

3 5 6

60

60

60

60

80

80

80

80

100

100

100

100

7

40

40

40

40

A A

RecommendedSettings:

Advanced...

Contrast

Boldness

PreheatTemperature

FuserTemperature

Oil Rate

Oil Belt

Printer

PDL

Print Quality

Features

Pre/PostProcessing

Network

InfoprintPOWER

Controller

6/2/058:56

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

50

Figure 44. Print Quality panel

1

4

2 3 5 6 7Contrast

g5au

d210

Figure 45. Contrast setting on the Print Quality panel


v Preheat Temperature - Adjust this setting by selecting the + or - button to increase or decrease thevalue by one unit. The default value depends on the specified paper weight and toner type. Valuesgreater than 85 or less than 15 will turn the scroll bar red, indicating that you are reaching the high endor the low end of adjustment.

The preheat temperature determines the amount of heat that is applied to the preheat platen. Thepreheat platen is the long curved metal plate that the paper travels on when entering the fuser area.Adjust this setting according to the type of paper being used. Normally lighter paper requires less heatand heavier paper requires more heat.

Adjusting this setting can help achieve the best fusing quality.

v Fuser Temperature - Adjust this setting by selecting the + or - button to increase or decrease the valueby one unit. The default value depends on the specified paper weight and toner type.

The fuser temperature determines the amount of heat that is applied to the fuser roll. Adjust this settingaccording to the type of paper being used. The middle setting should be used for light or normal weightpaper. The high setting should be used for heavier paper. A low setting of 0 should only be used ifinstructed by your Customer Support Specialist.

When printing forms with high toner coverage, more heat may be needed to fuse it correctly. Therefore,a high heat setting may be needed on a medium-weight paper that has high toner coverage.

v Oil Rate - Adjust this setting by selecting the + or - button to increase or decrease the value by oneunit. The default value depends on the specified paper weight and toner type.

The oil rate determines the amount of fuser oil that is applied to the fuser roll. Adjust this setting to alower number if a lower heat is being applied to the fuser roll (see Fuser Temperature above). Adjust itto a higher number if the fuser roll is being run at high heat.

Note: If your printer has an oil roll installed instead of an oil belt, you might need to lower the oil ratedown to 30 to prevent over oiling.

0 20 60 80 10040A ABoldness50

g5au

d206

Figure 46. Boldness setting on the Print Quality panel

0 20 60 80 10040PreheatTemperature

50

g5au

d207

Figure 47. Preheat Temperature setting on the Print Quality panel

0 100FuserTemperature

50

g5au

d208

Figure 48. Fuser Temperature setting on the Print Quality panel

0 20 60 80 10040Oil Rate50

g5au

d209

Figure 49. Oil Rate setting on the Print Quality panel


v Oil Belt - Adjust this setting by selecting the + or - button to increase or decrease the value by one unit.The default value depends on the specified paper weight and toner type.

The oil belt setting determines the speed of the oil belt. If the fuser temperature and oil rate areincreased, the oil belt speed can also be increased. If the fuser temperature and oil rate are decreased,the oil belt speed can also be decreased.

The oil belt speed may need to be increased if the forms give off excess ink or residue that sticks to thesurface of the oil belt.

Note:

If your printer has oil roll installed instead of an oil belt, this control will not display on the PrintQuality panel.

v Use Backup Idler Roll (select Advanced... to see this setting) - Select either Default, Yes, or No.

The backup idler roll applies extra pressure to the fuser roll and can help with fusing and wrinklingproblems on certain forms.

The default setting will set the roll to run at the same speed as the printer. If you are not sure of thespeed, select Yes to engage the backup idler roll or No to disengage it.

v Select OK to close the Advanced window.

v Select OK to close the Print Quality panel.

Copying Snapshots between InfoPrint ControllersDo this procedure to copy Snapshots from one InfoPrint Controller to another:

1. Plug the USB flash memory device into the InfoPrint Controller keyboard.

2. Select Maintenance → Backup and Recovery to display the Backup and Recovery panel.

3. Select Create Backup to copy the Snapshots file (config.bak) to the USB flash memory device.

4. Remove the USB flash memory device from the printer keyboard and move to the printer where youwant to copy the Snapshots.

5. Plug the USB flash memory device into the keyboard on the second printer.

6. Select Maintenance → Backup and Recovery to display the Backup and Recovery panel.

7. Select Load Configuration.

8. Do the following to load the Snapshots file from the USB flash memory device to the control unit:

a. Select Snapshots on the window that lists items to read from the recovery USB flash memorydevice.

b. Select OK.

Note: Select Summary to see a list of Snapshots currently on the printer.

c. On the resulting window, you can select whether to add only unique Snapshots, replace allSnapshots, or add unique Snapshots and replace Snapshots that are not unique.

Note: If you select Replace all snapshots or Add unique plus replace non-unique snapshots,the Snapshots on the USB flash memory device will overlay Snapshots that have the samename on the printer. Default Snapshots provided with the printer cannot be overlaid ordeleted.

0 20 60 80 10040Oil Belt50

g5au

d211

Figure 50. Oil Belt setting on the Print Quality panel


d. Select OK.


Copying Snapshots from the AFCCU to the InfoPrint ControllerDo this procedure to copy Snapshots from the AFCCU control unit to the InfoPrint Controller.

Note: The diskette that you use to do the following steps must be formatted so that no other data existson the diskette.

1. Do the following on the AFCCU control unit:

a. Insert a diskette into the diskette drive in the AFCCU control unit.

b. Select Maintenance → Diskette Operations to display the Diskette Operations panel.

c. Select Create Recovery Diskette to load the Snapshots file (cnfgdata.bak) to the diskette.

d. Copy the file from the diskette to a personal workstation that has a USB port.

e. Insert a USB flash memory device into the workstation and copy the Snapshots file to it.

Attention: Make sure the USB flash memory device you use does not contain a file namedconfig.bak.

2. Do the following on the InfoPrint Controller:

a. Plug the USB flash memory device into the keyboard on the InfoPrint Controller keyboard.

b. Select Maintenance → Backup and Recovery to display the Backup and Recovery panel.

c. Select Load Configuration. This displays a window that lists items to read from the recovery USBdevice.

3. Do the following to load the Snapshots from the diskette to the control unit:

a. Select Snapshots on the window that lists items to read from the recovery USB device.

b. Select OK.

c. On the resulting window, you can select whether to add only unique Snapshots, replace allSnapshots, or add unique Snapshots and replace Snapshots that are not unique.

Note: If you select Replace all snapshots or Add unique plus replace non-unique snapshots,the Snapshots on the diskette drive will overlay Snapshots that have the same name on theprinter. Default Snapshots provided with the printer cannot be overlaid or deleted.

d. Select OK.



Appendix A. Obtaining Supplies

OverviewThis appendix describes the printer supplies and how you can order and store them. For somemodels, it provides estimates for the quantity of forms (in feet) that each supply item can process.

SuppliesFor optimum print quality and reliability, use Ricoh supplies, which are engineered specifically for InfoPrintprinters. Use Table 54 on page 167 to help you order supplies for the printer before the system isdelivered, and to maintain a stock of supplies for continuous operation.

When a printer runs low on a supply item, it displays a status message on the touch panel, sounds analarm, and turns on the operator alert light on top of the printer.

Ricoh recommends that you keep the following quantities on hand per print engine:

Item Suggested Quantity

Toner 24 cartridges

Developer mix 4 bottles

Fuser oil 4 bottles

Oiler belt 2 belts

Fine filter 2 filters

Splicing tape 72 rolls

The estimated quantities are approximations for planning purposes only, and do not represent a warranty,a guarantee, or a minimum. The actual consumption depends on variables such as machine tonersettings, job-stream percent toner coverage, form characteristics, temperature, and humidity.

Also ensure that a toner-certified vacuum cleaner (see page 78) is available for printer operators to usewhen cleaning the printer.

165

Supplies Work SheetImportant Notes Concerning Supplies

Notes:

1. Make sure to use the correct part numbers when you order new supplies. Different models usedifferent supplies (such as toner, developer, fuser oil, oiler belts, and fine filters). Using the wrongdeveloper or toner, for example, causes serious print quality problems and will require a service call torestore correct print quality.

2. The toner bottle can also be used as a waste toner collection bottle.

Note: Do not reuse waste toner.

3. The yields listed in Table 55 on page 168 are approximations. They are not a warranty or guarantee ofminimum life, and are provided only to assist in supplies planning. Toner yield is affected by manyfactors, including print coverage per page, contrast setting, paper type and size, model type, andenvironmental conditions. More dense applications, such as extensive bar codes, or images, or solidarea fill, or printing with a higher contrast setting can expect to achieve yields lower than thoseachieved with the average text page. Your actual usage data should be used to establish the life of thesupply product in your specific application.

4. Yield estimates shown in Table 55 on page 168 are based on four square inches of toner coverage perfoot of forms (see note 6).

a. For MICR toner, approximate yields are based on an average signal strength setting of 120%.

b. For most toners, approximate yields are based on an optical density setting of 1.20.

c. for InfoPrint 4100 Enhanced Printing Toner Version 3 approximate yields are based on an opticaldensity setting of 1.05.

5. The life of the absorbent pad for the oil pan varies according to the way you run your printer. Ingeneral, the more often the printer is idle, the more often you may need to replace the pad. Ricohrecommends that you check the absorbent pad weekly. The InfoPrint 4000/4100 Operator's Guidecontains instructions for checking the pad. Contact your service representative for replacement pads.

6. When calculating yields for multiple-up printing, you must calculate for the side-by-side placement ofthe page on the form. For example, when printing 2-up on 8.5 x 11 inch paper, four square inchesmust be multiplied by 11/12, which equals 3.67 square inches. So for 2-up printing, you must divide3.67 by two, which equals 1.835 squares inches per page.

Table 54 on page 167, Table 55 on page 168, Table 56 on page 169, Table 57 on page 170, and Table 58on page 171 are work sheets that list supplies and their part numbers. Make copies of these work sheetsto use when you order supplies.


InfoPrint 4100 Models MS1, MD1/2, TS1, and TD1/2 Supplies WorkSheetTable 54. Supplies work sheet for InfoPrint 4100 Models MS1, MD1/2, TS1 and TD1/2

Supply Item Part Number Minimum Order Quantity Quantity Needed

InfoPrint Version 2 Toner3.0 kg (6.6 lb) cartridge

69G7377 1 carton (4 cartridges percarton)

InfoPrint Version 2 Developer(octagonal symbol on cap)4.0 kg (8.8 lb) bottle

69G73701 carton (2 bottles per carton)

Fuser Oil1-kg (2.2-lb) bottle

17R7655 1 carton (1 bottle per carton)

Oiler Belt 17R7656 1 carton (1 belt per carton)

Oil Pan Absorbent Pad 18R0409 1 carton (1 pad per carton)

Fine Filter 1372464 1 carton (1 filter per carton)

Extra Toner Bags 28P0446 1 carton (25 bags per carton)

Splicing Tape 41658802 1 carton (72 rolls per carton)

PTFE Mat (with FC 4941) 44D8243 1 package (4 mats perpackage)

Notes:

1. Refer to www.infoprint.com and select Supplies for information about estimated supplies yields.

2. Or order 3M Repulpable Forms Splicing Tape 8507 equivalent

Note:

Appendix A. Obtaining Supplies 167

InfoPrint 4100 Models HS2 and HD3/4 Supplies Work SheetTable 55. Supplies work sheet for InfoPrint 4100 Models HS2 and HD3/4



57P18871 carton (4 cartridges percarton)


57P1892 1 carton (2 bottles per carton)


17R77191 carton (4 cartridges percarton)


17R7720 1 carton (2 bottles per carton)

InfoPrint Version 5 Toner3.3 kg (7.3 lb) or 3.0 kg (6.6 lb)cartridge

56Y2500 1 carton (4 cartridges percarton)17R7725


56Y25011 carton (2 bottles per carton)

17R7726


56Y27001 carton (4 cartridges percarton)


56Y2701 1 carton (2 bottles per carton)

InfoPrint MICR Toner3.3 kg (7.3 lb) or 3.0 kg (6.6 lb)cartridge

56Y21001 carton (4 cartidges percarton)57P2074

InfoPrint MICR Developer4.0 kg or (8.8 lb) bottle


57P2100


1372463 1 carton (1 bottle per carton)

Oiler Belt 57P2249 1 carton (1 belt per carton)





PTFE Mat (with RPQ 8B5023 andFC 4940)

44D82441 package (4 mats perpackage)

Notes:




InfoPrint 4100 Models TS2 and TD3/4 Supplies Work SheetTable 56. Supplies work sheet for InfoPrint 4100 Models TS2 and TD3/4










57P2100




PTFE Mat (with RPQ 8B5023 andFC 4940)

44D82441 package (4 mats perpackage)





Notes:




||||

InfoPrint 4100 Models HS3 and HD5/6 Supplies Work SheetTable 57. Supplies work sheet for InfoPrint 4100 Models HS3 and HD5/6



69G73771 carton (4 cartridges percarton)


69G7370 1 carton (2 bottles per carton)









57P2100









Notes:




InfoPrint 4100 Models TS3 and TD5/6 Supplies Work SheetTable 58. Supplies work sheet for InfoPrint 4100 Models HS3 and HD5/6







56Y2100 1 carton (4 cartidges percarton)57P2074



57P2100









Notes:




Ordering SuppliesYou can order supplies directly from your service representative, who can assist you in the procedure forplacing your first order of supplies.

Maintenance Supply ItemsIn the U.S.A., Latin America, and EMEA, the Monthly Maintenance Charge includes the fuser oil, oiler belt,and fine filter. Approximately a 90-day stock of these items are supplied with each printer.

In the U.S.A., you can order these maintenance items by calling 1-800-346-3939 if you have aMaintenance Contract.

Customer-replaceable Supply ItemsIn North America, you can order supplies from the Supplies Fulfillment Operation (ISFO) at 888-426-7746.For information about ordering supplies for other locations, see www.infoprint.com and select “Supplies”.

Warranty ReturnsIf the supplies you receive are defective, return them to the place of purchase during the warranty periodfor a free replacement.

Include a copy of your invoice, a description of the problem, print-quality samples, and an estimate of theamount of printing already done with that supply.

This information applies only to supplies purchased in the U.S. In other countries, contact your point ofpurchase for information about returns.

Storing SuppliesStore printer supplies in the printer operating environment for at least one day before you use them. Atother times, you can store supplies in an environment that does not exceed the following requirements:

Temperature −25° to 40°C (−13° to 104°F)

Relative Humidity 5% to 90%

Forms have different storage requirements. Store forms in an area where temperature and humidity aresimilar to the environment in which they will be used. If forms do not adapt to moisture changes, wrinklesand voids can occur during printing.

Avoid areas of extreme heat or humidity. Extended exposure to these extremes can damage the materialspermanently. Relative humidity levels above 65% may reduce print quality.


Appendix B. Work Sheets

OverviewThis appendix contains work sheets on which you can record your installation requirements,configuration choices, and forms definitions for InfoPrint 4100 Models MS1, HS2, HS3, MD1/2,HD3/4, HD5/6, TS1, TS2, TS3, TD1/2, TD3/4, and TD5/6 printers. Fill in a copy of these work sheetsand give a copy of the completed form to the Customer Support Specialist when the printer isinstalled.

You can specify some configurations within the printer and some characteristics of its function. Forexample, you can select the language in which messages will be displayed. These options are known asconfiguration information.

The printer controller needs to know all of the current configuration information to operate the systemaccurately. Initially, the Customer Support Specialist sets configuration options when the printer is installed.You can change any of the configuration options later if the physical configuration changes or if theoperating characteristics change.

You can change all configuration information by using the touch panels.

173

Installation Planning Work SheetBefore your printer is delivered, prepare a site installation plan. Use the following work sheet to ensurethat all of the pre-installation requirements are met.

Table 59. InfoPrint 4100 installation planning work sheet

RequirementsMeetsRequirements:

NeedsAttention: Assigned to: Date Due:

DateCompleted:

Environmental

Ventilation

Temperature

Relative Humidity

Space

Layout

Storage space for supplies

Clearances

Delivery rout

Electrical

Outlets:

Can be reached by cables?

Correctly grounded?

Meet local and nationalcodes?

Building branch circuit:

Correctly grounded?

Is there a separate groundwire (not just conduit) for allconnections from the printerand pre/postprocessors that goto the ground bus bar of thecircuit breaker box?

Are the ground wire and theneutral wire between the circuitbreaker box and the source(building ground) separatewires?

Are the printer engine powerand the control unit powergoing to the same circuitbreaker box?

Enough power to meetneeds?Note: Note that the maximumload for low-voltage 60 Hzmachines is 55 Amps.Customer circuits must havesufficient rating to comply withlocal electrical code.

Meets local and nationalcodes?


Table 59. InfoPrint 4100 installation planning work sheet (continued)

RequirementsMeetsRequirements:

NeedsAttention: Assigned to: Date Due:

DateCompleted:

Host System Attachment

Ethernet cables andconnectors

FICON channel cables

ESCON channel cables

Security

Appendix B. Work Sheets 175

Physical Planning Work SheetThe physical planner:

v Identifies the location for the printer when the system is ordered

v Plans the electrical wiring and outlet requirements

v Schedules installing and testing of the electrical wiring and outlets before the printer arrives.

Use Table 60 as a work sheet when preparing the site for the printer.

Table 60. InfoPrint 4100 Models MS1, HS2, HS3, MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6, TS1, TS2, TS3, TD1/2, TD3/4, and TD5/6physical planning work sheet

Weeksbefore

DeliveryTask Assigned to:

Scheduled CompletionDate:

15 1. Identify the location for the printer and arrangefor any necessary changes to the site.

2. Identify a delivery route to the location of theprinter.

3. Prepare a layout plan.

4. Determine the requirements for electricaloutlets. If you are installing a Air BearingBuffer Flipper or an InfoPrint 4100 HS3,HD5/6, TS3, and TD5/6, you will needadditional outlets. See “Power Outlet andCable Summary” on page 78 for moreinformation.

5. Order the ‘H’ configuration unique items, suchas the turnbar/flipper and adapter piece.

___________

___________

___________

___________

___________

___________

___________

___________

___________

___________

10 1. Install and test the electrical wiring andoutlets.

2. Verify that a forklift and operator will beavailable when the printer arrives.

___________

___________

___________

___________

4 1. Order additional electrical service if required.Note: Note that the maximum load forlow-voltage 60 Hz machines is 55 Amps.Customer circuits must have sufficient ratingto comply with local electrical code.

___________

___________

___________

___________

Arrival 1. Unpack the printer and inspect it for externaldamage.

2. Move the printer to the prepared site.

___________

___________

___________

___________


Duplex Definition Work SheetRecord your configuration choices on this work sheet, and give a copy of the completed form to theCustomer Support Specialist when the printer is being installed. See Chapter 7, “Setting Printer DefinitionValues,” on page 109 for detailed information about each item.

Table 61. Duplex configuration work sheet

Item Available Values

Selected Values

DuplexSimplex

Printer 1 Printer 2


Printer 1 Contrast 1 to 7

Printer 2 Contrast 1 to 7

Printer 1 Boldness 0 to 100

Printer 2 Boldness 0 to 100

Printer 1 Preheat Temperature 1 to 100

Printer 2 Preheat Temperature 1 to 100

Printer 1 Fuser Temperature 1 to 100

Printer 2 Fuser Temperature 1 to 100

Printer 1 Oil Rate 1 to 100

Printer 2 Oil Rate 1 to 100

Printer 1 Oil Belt 2 to 100

Printer 2 Oil Belt 2 to 100

Example Settings Medium / Heavy


Table 61. Duplex configuration work sheet (continued)


Selected Values

DuplexSimplex

Printer 1 Printer 2


Printer 1 Use Backup Idler Roll Yes / No

Printer 2 Use Backup Idler Roll Yes / No

Printer 1 Preheat Offset -100 to 20

Printer 2 Preheat Offset -100 to 20

Fuser Startup Boost None / Low / Middle / High

Default is High

Lower Tension Arm Pressure Normal / Medium / High

Default is Normal

Set to Medium for forms < 75gsm

Lower Tension Arm StartupTiming

−8 to 18

Default is 0

Urge Unit Drive Roll Control (Service Change Only)

No drive / 10 min. / 60 min.

Default is No drive


||

|

|||

||

|

||

|||

|||

|

|||

||

|

|

|||



Selected Values

DuplexSimplex

Printer 1 Printer 2


Printer Mode Duplex / Simplex

Printer Speed High/Low

Side 2 Verify Enable / Disable N/A N/A N/A

Front Sheet Sequence (Duplexmode only)

v Front First

v Front Second

N/A N/A

Same Side Printing Yes / No

Eject to Front Facing v Enabled

v Disabled

Auto NPRO at EOF Yes / No

Language v English

v Spanish

v German

v Japanese Kanji

v French

v Italian




v Korean

v Russian

Keyboard Language v English

v Spanish

v German

v Japanese Kanji

v French

v Italian




v Korean

v Russian




Selected Values

DuplexSimplex

Printer 1 Printer 2

Printer Definition → Printer → Setup

MICR Installed v None

v Printer 1

v Printer 2

Printer 1 Hot Roll Type v Soft

v Hard

Printer 2 Hot Roll Type v Soft

v Hard

Jam Recovery Point Distance 0 to 700 inches

Print 1 to Printer 2 Distance(Duplex mode only)

150 to 800 inches N/A N/A

NPRO Length 0 to 1200 inches

Fuser Sleep Timeout v None

v 1 Hour

v 2 Hours

v 4 Hours

Clear Memory for Security Yes / No

Audible Alarm Yes / No

Auto Align Yes / No

Contact Text entry field - up to 80alphanumeric characters

Printer Name Text entry field - up to 80alphanumeric characters

Engine 1 Name Text entry field - up to 80alphanumeric characters

Engine 2 Name Text entry field - up to 80alphanumeric characters

Printer Location Text entry field - up to 80alphanumeric characters

Support Address Name Text entry field - up to 80alphanumeric characters

Support Address URL Text entry field - up to 255alphanumeric characters


||

|

|||

||

|

|||



Selected Values

DuplexSimplex

Printer 1 Printer 2

Printer Definition → Printer → Setup → Advanced

Stop on Toner Low Yes / No

Open Clear Buffers Alert Yes / No

Dual Sensor Installed Yes / No

Required Log Entry Timeout v Disabled

v 1 minute

v 2 minutes

v 4 minutes

v 15 minutes

v 30 minutes

N/A N/A N/A




Selected Values

DuplexSimplex

Printer 1 Printer 2


Date and Time yyyy=year, mm=month, dd=day,hh=hour, mm=minute,ss=seconds

N/A N/A N/A

Time Zone N/A N/A N/A

Time Zone N/A N/A N/A

Time Source Manual / Specific NetworkServer / Any Network Server

N/A N/A N/A




Selected Values

DuplexSimplex

Printer 1 Printer 2


IPDS Font Usage v High

v Medium

v Low

IPDS Page Segment Usage v Unlimited (Disk)

v High (RAM)

v Medium (RAM)

v Low (RAM)

IPDS Overlay Usage v High

v Medium

v Low

v None

IPDS Input Buffer Size v Low

v Medium

v High

Output Buffer Size v Low

v Medium

v High




Selected Values

DuplexSimplex

Printer 1 Printer 2


Cut Sheet Emulation v None





IPDS Printhead Resolution v 480

v 600

The values available dependon the model of the printer.

To have a selectable IPDSresolution, select 600.

IPDS Resolution v Automatic

v 240

v 300

v 600

The values available dependon the model of the printer andthe printhead resolutionselected.

Reprint Pages After Jams v Yes


v No

Logical Page Increment 0 to 20 pels

3130 Bar Code Emulation Yes / No

Simulate Color with Gray Yes / No

Single-Byte Font Smoothing Yes / No

Double-Byte Font Smoothing Yes / No

Suppress Off Page Errors 0 to 100 Pels

Scale GOCA Lines Yes / No




Selected Values

DuplexSimplex

Printer 1 Printer 2

Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Channels → ESCON

Adapter Cards v ESCON Link A

v ESCON Link B

Device Address X'00' to X'FF' (Hexadecimalnotation)

Multi-Host Environment Flag v True

v False

Maximum Block Length v 32K

v 64K

Priority 1 to 10




Selected Values

DuplexSimplex

Printer 1 Printer 2

Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Channels → FICON

Adapter Cards v FICON Link A

v FICON Link B

Device Address X'00' to X'FF' (Hexadecimalnotation)


v False


v 64K

Media Speed (FICON Link A) v Autonegotiate

v 1 Gigabit

v 2 Gigabits

Media Speed FICON Link B v Autonegotiate

v 1 Gigabit

v 2 Gigabits

Priority 1 to 10




Selected Values

DuplexSimplex

Printer 1 Printer 2


DHCP Addressing On / Off

DHCP Plug-and-Play Enable / Disable

DHCP Time Out 1 to 300

IP Address X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255

Subnet Mask X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255

Internet Name of Local Host

IP Address of Primary andSecondary DNS server


Media Speed v Auto Negotiation

v 10 Half Duplex

v 10 Full Duplex

v 100 Half Duplex

v 100 Full Duplex

Default Gateway Address X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255

Domain Name of Local Host X.X.X.X where X is analphanumeric character




Selected Values

DuplexSimplex

Printer 1 Printer 2

Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Ethernet Adapters → Ethernet Copper NIC










v 10 Half Duplex

v 10 Full Duplex

v 100 Half Duplex

v 100 Full Duplex






Selected Values

DuplexSimplex

Printer 1 Printer 2

Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Ethernet Adapters → Ethernet Fiber NIC










v 10 Half Duplex

v 10 Full Duplex

v 100 Half Duplex

v 100 Full Duplex






Selected Values

DuplexSimplex

Printer 1 Printer 2


DHCP Addressing Not supported on the serviceadapter.

DHCP Plug-and-Play Not supported on the serviceadapter.

DHCP Time Out Not supported on the serviceadapter.



Internet Name of Local Host Not supported on the serviceadapter.


Not supported on the serviceadapter.


v 10 Half Duplex

v 10 Full Duplex

v 100 Half Duplex

v 100 Full Duplex






Selected Values

DuplexSimplex

Printer 1 Printer 2

Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Ethernet Protocols → IPDS TCP

TCP Port 5001 to 65535

Data Timeout 0 to 300 seconds

Priority 1 to 10




Selected Values

DuplexSimplex

Printer 1 Printer 2

Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Ethernet Protocols → FTP (Service)





Selected Values

DuplexSimplex

Printer 1 Printer 2

Printer Definition → Network → Attachments → Ethernet Protocols → Push Print (Service)





Selected Values

DuplexSimplex

Printer 1 Printer 2


SNMP Agent Enabled v Yes

v No

Match Printer 1

Allow to Configure Printer v Yes

v No

Match Printer 1

SNMP Trap Host X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255 Match Printer 1

SNMP Community Name Alphanumeric characters Match Printer 1




Selected Values

DuplexSimplex

Printer 1 Printer 2


Online Access (Web Pages) v Yes

v No

Match Printer 1




Selected Values

DuplexSimplex

Printer 1 Printer 2


E-mail Enabled v Yes

v No

Match Printer 1

Printer Supplies E-mail address Text entry field Match Printer 1

Printer Problems E-mailaddress

Text entry field Match Printer 1

Printer Service E-mail address Text entry field Match Printer 1

Default Trace E-mailDestination

Text entry field Match Printer 1

SMTP Mail Server Hostname orIP Address

Alphanumeric for hostname ordotted decimal for IP address(X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255)

Match Printer 1

SMTP Timeout 0 to 999 Match Printer 1




Selected Values

DuplexSimplex

Printer 1 Printer 2


Telnet 3270 Enabled v Yes

v No

Telnet 3270 Hostname or IPAddress





Selected Values

DuplexSimplex

Printer 1 Printer 2


Telnet 5250 Enabled v Yes

v No

Telnet 5250 Hostname or IPAddress





Selected Values

DuplexSimplex

Printer 1 Printer 2

Printer Definition → Network → Remote Access → InfoPrint Process Director (IPPD)

IPPD Enabled v Yes

v No

URL for IPPD Application Text entry field - up to 255alphanumeric characters




Selected Values

DuplexSimplex

Printer 1 Printer 2

Printer Definition → Network → Remote Access → MRPD

MRPD Automatic FTP TransferEnabled

v Yes

v No




Selected Values

DuplexSimplex

Printer 1 Printer 2


Print Jobs v Restricted

v Unrestricted

SNMP v Restricted

v Unrestricted

Online Access (Web Pages) v Restricted

v Unrestricted

Productivity Tracking Feature v Restricted

v Unrestricted

Ranges v Inactive

v Active




Selected Values

DuplexSimplex

Printer 1 Printer 2

Printer Definition → Pre/Postprocessing

New Device Name 1-12 alphanumeric characters(including spaces)

New Device Type v Coupled Preprocessor


v Advanced Postprocessor -MICR

v Advanced Postprocessor -Bar Code Checking

v UP3I Sequences




Selected Values

DuplexSimplex

Printer 1 Printer 2


Use Internal Stacker Yes / No

Offsetter Enabled Yes / No

BTS Enabled Yes / No

Offset on Mark Forms Yes / No




Selected Values

DuplexSimplex

Printer 1 Printer 2

Printer Definition → Pre/Postprocessing → UP3I Devices

UP3I Device Name

Distance


Simplex Definition Work SheetRecord your configuration choices on this work sheet, and give a copy of the completed form to theCustomer Support Specialist when the printer is being installed. See Chapter 7, “Setting Printer DefinitionValues,” on page 109 for detailed information about each item.

Table 62. Simplex configuration work sheet

Item Available Values Selected Value


Contrast 1 to 7

Boldness 0 to 100

Preheat Temperature 1 to 100

Fuser Temperature 1 to 100

Oil Rate 1 to 100

Oil Belt 2 to 100

Example Settings Medium / Heavy


Table 62. Simplex configuration work sheet (continued)


Printer Definition → Print Quality → Beam Adjustments

Beam 1 Offset Adjustment Cannot be changed. N/A

Beam 2 Offset Adjustment (Service Change Only) N/A







Printer Definition → Print Quality → PQE Adjustments

Beam Number (Service Change Only) N/A

Current Vector (Service Change Only) N/A

Vector Boldness (Service Change Only) N/A

Horizontal High (Service Change Only) N/A

Horizontal Low (Service Change Only) N/A

Vertical High (Service Change Only) N/A

Vertical Low (Service Change Only) N/A





Use Backup Idler Roll Yes / No

Preheat Offset) -100 to 20

Fuser Startup Boost None / Low / Middle / High

Default is High

Lower Tension Arm Pressure Normal / Medium / High

Default is Normal

Set to Medium for forms < 75 gsm

Lower Tension Arm Startup Timing −8 to 18

Default is 0

Urge Unit Drive Roll Control (Service Change Only)

No drive / 10 min. / 60 min.

Default is No drive


||

|

|

||

|

|

|

||

|

|

||

|

|

|




Printer Mode Simplex

Printer Speed High / Low

Same Side Printing Yes / No

Eject to Front Facing v Enabled

v Disabled

Auto NPRO at EOF Yes / No

Language v English

v Spanish

v German

v Japanese Kanji

v French

v Italian




v Korean

v Russian

v Hungarian

Keyboard Language v English

v Spanish

v German

v Japanese Kanji

v French

v Italian




v Korean

v Russian

v Hungarian





Snapshot Mode (Service Change Only) N/A

MICR Installed v None

v Printer 1

v Printer 2

Hot Roll Type v Soft

v Hard

Jam Recovery Point Distance 0 to 700 inches

NPRO Length 0 to 1200 inches

Fuser Sleep Timeout v None

v 1 Hour

v 2 Hours

v 4 Hours

Clear Memory for Security Yes / No

Audible Alarm Yes / No

Auto Align Yes / No

Contact Text entry field - up to 80 alphnumericcharacters

Printer Name Text entry field - up to 80 alphnumericcharacters

Engine Name Text entry field - up to 80 alphnumericcharacters

Printer Location Text entry field - up to 80 alphnumericcharacters

Support Address Name Text entry field - up to 80 alphnumericcharacters

Support Address URL Text entry field - up to 255alphnumeric characters


|



Printer Definition → Printer → Setup → Advanced

Stop on Toner Low Yes / No

Open Clear Buffers Alert Yes / No

Dual Sensor Installed Yes / No

Required Log Entry Timeout v Disabled

v 1 minute

v 2 minutes

v 4 minutes

v 15 minutes

v 30 minutes





Date and Time yyyy=year, mm=month, dd=day,hh=hour, mm=minute, ss=seconds

Time Zone

Time Zone

Time Source Manual / Specific Network Server /Any Network Server




Printer Definition → Printer → Service

Machine Serial (CE change on initial configurationonly)

N/A

Print Count (Service Change Only)

Backup Idler Roll Installed (Service Change Only) N/A

Toner Type (Service Change Only)

Scan Factory Adjustment (Service Change Only) N/A

Process Factory Adjustment (Service Change Only) N/A





IPDS Font Usage v High

v Medium

v Low

IPDS Page Segment Usage v Unlimited (Disk)

v High (RAM)

v Medium (RAM)

v Low (RAM)

IPDS Overlay Usage v High

v Medium

v Low

v None

IPDS Input Buffer Size v Low

v Medium

v High

Output Buffer Size v Low

v Medium

v High





Cut Sheet Emulation v None





IPDS Printhead Resolution v 480

v 600

The values available depend on themodel of the printer.

To have a selectable IPDS resolution,select 600.

IPDS Resolution v Automatic

v 240

v 300

v 600

The values available depend on themodel of the printer and the printheadresolution selected.

Reprint Pages After Jams v Yes


v No

Logical Page Increment 0 to 20 pels

3130 Bar Code Emulation Yes / No

Simulate Color with Gray Yes / No

Single-Byte Font Smoothing Yes / No

Double-Byte Font Smoothing Yes / No

Suppress Off Page Errors Yes / No

Scale GOCA Lines Yes / No




Printer Definition → Network → Adapters → Ethernet Copper Integrated #1







IP Address of Primary and Secondary DNSServer


Media Speed v Auto negotiation

v 10 Half Duplex

v 10 Full Duplex

v 100 Half Duplex

v 100 Full Duplex


Domain Name of Local Host X.X.X.X where X is an alphanumericcharacter




Printer Definition → Network → Adapters → Ethernet Copper Integrated #2 (Service)

DHCP Addressing Not supported on the service adapter.

DHCP Plug-and-Play Not supported on the service adapter.

DHCP Time Out Not supported on the service adapter.



Internet Name of Local Host Not supported on the service adapter.

IP Address of Primary and Secondary DNSServer

Not supported on the service adapter.

Media Speed v Auto negotiation

v 10 Half Duplex

v 10 Full Duplex

v 100 Half Duplex

v 100 Full Duplex


Domain Name of Local Host X.X.X.X where X is an alphanumericcharacter




Printer Definition → Network → Adapters → FICONNote: Channel adapters cannot be installed or unistalled. If the adapter card is physically present on the printercontroller, the adapter is automatically installed. Therefore, the Edit..., Install..., and Uninstall buttons are notavailable on the Network - Adapters panel. Parameters for channel adapters are specified using the Network -

Protocols panel (Printer Definition → Network → Protocols).




Printer Definition → Network → Adapters → ESCONNote: Channel adapters cannot be installed or unistalled. If the adapter card is physically present on the printercontroller, the adapter is automatically installed. Therefore, the Edit..., Install..., and Uninstall buttons are notavailable on the Network - Adapters panel. Parameters for channel adapters are specified using the Network -

Protocols panel (Printer Definition → Network → Protocols).




Printer Definition → Network → Protocols → TCP

TCP Port 5001 to 65535


Priority 1 to 10




Printer Definition → Network → Protocols → FICON

Adapter Cards v FICON Link A

v FICON Link B

Device Address X'00' to X'FF' (Hexadecimal notation)


v False


v 64K

Media Speed (FICON Link A) v Autonegotiate

v 1 Gigabit

v 2 Gigabits

Media Speed FICON Link B v Autonegotiate

v 1 Gigabit

v 2 Gigabits

Priority 1 to 10




Printer Definition → Network → Protocols → ESCON

Adapter Cards v ESCON Link A

v ESCON Link B

Device Address X'00' to X'FF' (Hexadecimal notation)


v False


v 64K

Priority 1 to 10




Printer Definition → Network → Protocols → FTP (Service)


Priority 1 to 10





SNMP Agent Enabled v Yes

v No

Allow to Configure Printer v Yes

v No

SNMP Trap Host X.X.X.X where X ≤ 255

SNMP Community Name Alphanumeric characters





Online Access (Web Pages) v Yes

v No





E-mail Enabled v Yes

v No

Printer Supplies E-mail address Text entry field

Printer Problems E-mail address Text entry field

Printer Service E-mail address Text entry field

Default Trace E-mail Destination Text entry field

SMTP Mail Server Hostname or IP Address Alphanumeric for hostname or dotteddecimal for IP address (X.X.X.X whereX ≤ 255)

SMTP Timeout 0 to 999




Printer Definition → Network → Remote Access → MRPD

MRPD Automatic FTP Transfer Enabled v Yes

v No





Print Jobs v Restricted

v Unrestricted

SNMP v Restricted

v Unrestricted

Online Access (Web Pages) v Restricted

v Unrestricted

Productivity Tracking Feature v Restricted

v Unrestricted

Ranges v Inactive

v Unrestricted

v Active




Printer Definition → Pre/Postprocessing

DEVICE Number__________




v Advanced Postprocessor - MICR


v UP3I Sequence














Snapshots Work SheetUse the work sheet on page 231 to record Snapshot settings. You have the option of saving all settings orof saving only form settings. Your Customer Support Specialist can use the Printer - Setup panel (PrinterDefinition → Printer → Setup) to select whether to save all settings or save only form settings. Makecopies of the work sheets as necessary.

You may also find it helpful to make notes about loading techniques, adjusting print values, or otherinformation that may be particular to certain Snapshots.


Table 63. Snapshots work sheet

Snapshot: Setting Value: Notes:


v Length

v Width

v Unit of Measure

v IPDS Form Name

v IPDS Host Setup ID

v Form Bar Code

v Form Type

v Oversize Paper

v Paper Weight

v Registration Marks

– Printer Registration Marks

– TOF Offset

v Commercial Print

v _______________

v _______________

v _______________

v _______________

v _______________

v _______________

v _______________

v _______________

v _______________

v _______________

v _______________

Forms → Print Registration

v Paper Feed Direction forPrinter 2

v Paper Feed Direction forPrinter 1

v Across paper Feed Directionfor Printer 2

v Across paper Feed Directionfor Printer 1

v _______________

v _______________

v _______________

v _______________


v Contrast

v Boldness

v Preheat Temperature

v Fuser Temperature

v Oil Rate

v Oil Belt Speed

v Advanced

– Use Backup Idler Roll

– Preheat Offset (Serviceonly)

– Fuser Startup Boost

– Lower Tension ArmPressure

– Lower Tension Arm StartupTiming

– Urge Unit Drive Roll Control

v _______________

v _______________

v _______________

v _______________

v _______________

v _______________

v _______________

– _______________

– _______________

– _______________

– _______________

– _______________

Printer Definition → Printer →Basic

v Printer Speed

v Front Sheet Sequence

v Eject to Front Facing

v Auto NPRO at EOF

v _______________

v _______________

v _______________

v _______________


|

|

||

||

|

Table 63. Snapshots work sheet (continued)

Snapshot: Setting Value: Notes:



v Jam Recovery Point Distance

v Hot Roll Type

v _______________

v _______________


v Cutsheet Emulation

v Reprint Pages after Jams

v IPDS Resolution

v IPDS Printhead Resolution

v _______________

v _______________

v _______________

v _______________


v Use Internal Stacker

v Offsetter Enabled

v BTS Enabled

v Offset on Mark Forms

v _______________

v _______________

v _______________


|

Appendix C. Standard Power Plug Listings

OverviewThis appendix contains details about the power plugs used in the control unit, printer utility module,and Air Bearing Buffer/Flipper Unit including the countries they support, the electrical standard theymeet, and their physical dimensions.

Table 64 shows the applicable standard and a diagram of the power plug for common plug types.Diagrams show the contact arrangement and dimensions. Plug dimensions are nominal and are given forreference purposes only. Pole and wire configurations are 2-pole, 3-wire plugs. Diagrams of power plugsrequiring polarization are so marked. Single-phase plugs may be marked with the E, G, or earth symbol forprotective earth, and N or W for neutral.

Devices are rated for 10 Amperes and you should ensure that the appropriate service is provided.

Table 64. Standard power plugs for control unit, printer utility module, and Air Bearing Buffer Flipper Unit

Country or Region Standard Power Plug Diagram

Bahamas, Barbados,Bermuda, Bolivia,Brazil, Canada,Cayman Islands,Columbia, Costa Rica,Domican Republic,Ecuador, El Salvador,Guatemala, Guayana,Haiti, Honduras,Jamaica, Japan, SouthKorea, Mexico,Netherlands Antilles,Nicaragua, Panama,Peru, Phillipines,Puerto Rico, SaudiArabia, Suriname,Trinidad, Taiwan,U.S.A., Venezuela

NEMA WD-1 6–15P

Argentina, Australia,Columbia, NewZealand, Paraguay,Uruguay

IEC 83–A5 1957 18.29

(.25)

(.06)

(.312)

6.35

1.52

7.92

(.72)

(.4)

30

10.16

(.675)21.34

233

Table 64. Standard power plugs for control unit, printer utility module, and Air Bearing Buffer Flipper Unit (continued)


Denmark NORMBLAD 419 0.5

14 0.5

13 0.3

36.5 0.5

O4.8 0.06

19 0.2min.3.5

4-0.1

3-0.2

0

0 45O6-0.06

+-

+-

+-

+- +-

+-

Abu Dhabi, Austria,Belgium, Bulgaria,Botswana, Egypt,Finland, France,Germany, Greece,Iceland, Indonesia,South Korea, Lebanon,Luxembourg, China(Macao S.A.R.),Netherlands, Norway,Portugal, Saudi Arabia,Spain, Sudan, Sweden,Turkey, Yugoslavia

CEE7 VII

Israel SII-32–1971


Table 64. Standard power plugs for control unit, printer utility module, and Air Bearing Buffer Flipper Unit (continued)


Chile, Ethiopia, Italy CEI 23–16

INSULATINGCOLLAR

Bangladesh, Burma,Pakistan, South Africa,Sri-Lanka

SABS 164, BS 546

INSULATING COLLAR

Switzerland SEV SN 416534 NEUTRAL PIN

EARTH PIN

Bahrain, Bermuda,Brunei, ChannelIslands, Cyprus,Ghana, China (HongKong S.A.R.), India,Iraq, Ireland, Jordan,Kenya, Kuwait, Malawi,Malaysia, Nigeria,Oman, People'sRepublic of China,Singapore, Tanzania,Uganda, United ArabEmirates, UnitedKingdom, Zambia

BS 1363

INSULATINGCOLLAR

FUSE UNDER COVER

Appendix C. Standard Power Plug Listings 235


Notices

This information was developed for products and services offered in the U.S.A.

Ricoh may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in other countries.Consult your local Ricoh representative for information on the products and services currently available inyour area. Any reference to a Ricoh product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that onlythat Ricoh product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, orservice that does not infringe any Ricoh intellectual property rights may be used instead. However, it is theuser's responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any non-Ricoh product, program, or service.

References in this document to Ricoh products, product features, programs or services do not imply thatRicoh intends to make such products, product features, programs or services available in all countries inwhich Ricoh operates or does business.

Ricoh may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter described in thisdocument. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents. You can sendlicense inquiries, in writing, to:

Ricoh Company, Ltd.6300 Diagonal Hwy 002JBoulder, CO 80301-9270U.S.A.

The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other country where suchprovisions are inconsistent with local law: RICOH PRODUCTION PRINT SOLUTIONS, LLCPROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS ORIMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT,MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimerof express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you.

This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodicallymade to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication.Ricoh may make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) described in this publication at any timewithout notice.

Any references in this information to non-Ricoh Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not inany manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part ofthe materials for this Ricoh product and use of those Web sites is at your own risk.

Ricoh may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate withoutincurring any obligation to you.

Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled environment. Therefore, the resultsobtained in other operating environments may vary significantly. Some measurements may have beenmade on development-level systems and there is no guarantee that these measurements will be the sameon generally available systems. Furthermore, some measurement may have been estimated throughextrapolation. Actual results may vary. Users of this document should verify the applicable data for theirspecific environment.

Information concerning non-Ricoh products was obtained from the suppliers of those products, theirpublished announcements or other publicly available sources. Ricoh has not tested those products andcannot confirm the accuracy of performance, compatibility or any other claims related to non-Ricohproducts. Questions on the capabilities of non-Ricoh products should be addressed to the suppliers ofthose products.

237

All statements regarding Ricoh's future direction or intent are subject to change or withdrawal withoutnotice, and represent goals and objectives only.

If you are viewing this information softcopy, the photographs and color illustrations may not appear.

All models of the printer meet the requirements of IEC 950 and all amendments. The laser used in theprinter complies with IEC 825 and EN 60825.

Notice: This mark applies only to countries within the European Union (EU), Norway, and Switzerland.

Appliances are labeled in accordance with European Directive 2002/96/EC concerning waste electrical andelectronic equipment (WEEE). The Directive determines the framework for the return and recycling of usedappliances as applicable throughout the European Union. This label is applied to various products toindicate that the product is not to be thrown away, but rather reclaimed upon end of life per this Directive.

In accordance with the European WEEE Directive, electrical and electronic equipment (EEE) is to becollected separately and to be reused, recycled, or recovered at end of life. Users of EEE with the WEEEmarking per Annex IV of the WEEE Directive, as shown above, must not dispose of end of life EEE asunsorted municipal waste, but use the collection framework available to customers for the return, recyclingand recovery of WEEE. Customer participation is important to minimize any potential effects of EEE on theenvironment and human health due to the potential presence of hazardous substances in EEE. For propercollection and treatment, contact your local Ricoh representative.

TrademarksThese terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of Ricoh Co., Ltd., in the United States, othercountries, or both:

v Advanced Function Presentation

v Advanced Function Printing

v AFCCU

v AFP

v InfoPrint

v Infoprint

v Intelligent Printer Data Stream

v IPDS

v Ricoh

These terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation inthe United States, other countries, or both:

v ESCON

v GDDM

v IBM

v MVS


v MVS/SP

v Print Services Facility

v System/360

v System/370

Adobe, the Adobe logo, PostScript, and the PostScript logo are either registered trademarks or trademarksof Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.

Intel, Intel Inside (logos), MMX, and Pentium are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States,other countries, or both.

Java and all Java-based trademarks are trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States, othercountries, or both.

Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other countries, or both.

Microsoft is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both.

UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries.

Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others.

Notices 239

Communication statementsFederal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuantto Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmfulinterference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with theinstruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipmentin a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required tocorrect the interference at his own expense.

Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to meet FCC emissionlimits. Ricoh is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other thanrecommended cables and connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment.Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

European Union (EU) Conformity Statement:

Hereby, Ricoh declares that this product is in compliance with the essentialrequirements and other relevant provisions with all applicable EU directives.

Ricoh cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from anon-recommended modification of the product, including the fitting of non-Ricoh option cards.

This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A Information TechnologyEquipment according to European standard EN 55022 current edition. The limits for Class A equipmentwere derived for commercial and industrial environments to provide reasonable protection againstinterference with licensed communication devices.

ImportantThis is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference inwhich case the user may be required to take adequate measures.

Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to reduce the potential forcausing interference to radio and TV communications and to other electrical or electronic equipment. Ricohcannot accept responsibility for any interference caused by using other than recommended cables andconnectors.

Industry Canada Compliance Statement

This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conform à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

Statement for CISPR 22 current edition Compliance: Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domesticenvironment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to takeadequate measures.


Japanese VCCI Class A:

Korea:

Notices 241


Glossary

The following terms are defined as they are usedin InfoPrint® 4100 documentation.

The following cross-references are used in thisglossary:

v Contrast with. This refers to a term that has anopposed or substantively different meaning.

v Synonym for. This indicates that the term hasthe same meaning as another term, which isdefined.

v Synonymous with. This identifies terms that aresynonyms for the term that is defined.

v See. This refers to multiple-word terms thathave the same last word.

v See also. This refers to related terms that havea similar, but not synonymous, meaning.

AAdapter. See Network adapter.

Advanced Function Common Control Unit(AFCCU™). An IBM RISC-based control unit with codecommon to all printers that use the AFCCU.

Advanced Function Image and Graphics Facility. Acapability of the InfoPrint 4100 to directly process IO1image and DR2 vector graphics data streams.

all-points addressability. The capability to address,reference, and position text, overlays, and images atany defined point on the printable area of a page.

application. The use to which an informationprocessing system is put; for example, a payrollapplication, an airline reservation application, a networkapplication.

application program. A program written for or by auser that applies to the user's work, such as a programthat does inventory control or payroll.

application programmer. A person who developsapplication programs. Contrast with systemprogrammer.

auto load. In the InfoPrint 4100, the automatic formsthreading facility.

Bbar code. An array of elements, such as bars, spaces,and two-dimensional modules that together representdata elements or characters in a particular symbology.

The elements are arranged in a predetermined patternfollowing unambiguous rules define by the symbology.

bar code symbol. A combination of charactersincluding start and stop characters, quiet zones, datacharacters, and check characters required by aparticular symbology, that form a complete scannableentity.

bar code symbology. A bar code language. Bar codesymbologies are defined and controlled by variousindustry groups and standards organizations. Bar codesymbologies are described in public domain bar codespecification documents.

basis weight. The weight in pounds of a ream (500sheets) of paper cut to a given standard size for thatgrade; for example, 25 x 38 inches for book papers,17 x 22 inches for bond papers, and other sizes forother grades. The basis weight of continuous forms forcomputer output is based on the size for bond papers.

binder holes. A series of holes or slots punched at setintervals that allows the form to be inserted in aloose-leaf or ring binder.

bond (paper). Paper formulated with at least 80%wood pulp. Bond-paper forms work best in the InfoPrint4100.

Ccalender. A process to make paper smooth or glossyby passing it through a series of metal rollers during thelast steps of a paper-making machine.

calender cut. Slits, glazed lines, or discolored linesacross the paper caused when wrinkles pass throughthe calender rollers.

caliper. The thickness of forms. This is usuallyexpressed in thousandths of an inch.

chad. (1) The material separated from a data mediumwhen punching a hole. (2) The residue separated fromthe carrier holes in continuous forms.

change. As used in InfoPrint 4100 action messages,instructs the printer operator to remove and discard aused component and then install a new one. Forexample, the CHANGE TONER COLLECTOR messageindicates that the operator should take out thetoner-collector bottle, throw it away, and put in a newone.

channel command. An instruction directing a datachannel, control unit, or device to perform an operationor set of operations.

243

character. A letter, number, punctuation mark, orspecial graphic used for the production of text.

character set. (1) A finite set of different charactersthat is complete for a given purpose; for example, thecharacter set in ISO Standard 646, “7-bit CodedCharacter Set of Information Processing Interchange.”(2) A group of characters used for a specific reason; forexample, the set of characters a printer can print.

check. As used in InfoPrint 4100 action messages,instructs the printer operator to inspect a component.For example, the CHECK TONER COLLECTOR messageindicates that the operator should look at thetoner-collector bottle and ensure that it is physicallypresent, in the proper place, and correctly installed.

clear. As used in InfoPrint 4100 action messages,instructs the printer operator to remove crumpled forms,paper scraps, and other debris from the printer. Forexample, the CLEAR UPPER TRACTOR message indicatesthat forms are wedged in the transfer station area, andthe operator must remove them before the printer canoperate.

coated paper. Paper that has had a surface coatingapplied to produce smoothness.

configuration. (1) The arrangement of a computersystem or network as defined by the nature, thenumber, and the chief characteristics of its functionalunits. More specifically, the term configuration may referto a hardware configuration or a software configuration.(2) The devices and programs that make up a system,subsystem, or network.

configure. The procedure used to customize theInfoPrint 4100 to a specific operating andcommunication environment.

connector. A means of establishing electrical flow.

constant data. Data that does not change; forexample, the company letterhead and standard text inform letters, or the headings and boxes on a preprintedform. Contrast with variable data.

continuous forms. A series of connected forms thatfeed continuously through a printing device. Theconnection between the forms is perforated to allow theuser to tear them apart.

controlled-access area. An area where access islimited to authorized personnel.

controlling computer. The processing unit to whichthe InfoPrint 4100 are attached through a channelinterface.

controlling computer system. The data-processingsystem to which a network is connected and with whichthe system can communicate.

corner cut. In a form, a cut or opening of any sizecontaining one or more right angles.

corona. A small diameter wire (or wires, depending onthe function) to which a high voltage is applied, causingionization of the air. The ionization creates an electricalcharge to perform various functions during the printingprocess.

cure. The process of drying ink sufficiently forminimum transfer of the ink to any parts of the printer itcontacts.

Customer Support Specialist. (formerly servicerepresentative). A Ricoh employee who services Ricohproducts in the field.

cut. The severed part of a perforation. Cuts areseparated by ties. See also perforation.

cutout. A part of the form that has been eliminated orperforated for subsequent removal; for example, cornercuts and binder holes.

Ddata streaming. A noninterlocked method of datatransfer used by the printer channel to decrease datatransfer time during write operations.

developed image. The image that has been exposedonto the photoconductor and covered with toner by thedeveloper.

developer mix. A combination of carrier beads andtoner in which the beads electrically charge the toner.

diagnostic. Pertaining to the detection and isolation oferrors in programs and faults in equipment.

diagnostic mode. The operational mode in which theprinter can check itself in case of a malfunction. Whenthe InfoPrint 4100 is in diagnostic mode, it is notaccepting information from the attached controllingcomputer system. In the InfoPrint 4100, only CustomerSupport Specialists can use diagnostic mode. Contrastwith print mode and test mode.

direct attach. The environment in which an applicationprogram directly allocates the InfoPrint 4100 printingsubsystem.

dishing. The curve a stack of forms takes when foldedor refolded at the fold perforation.

diskette. A thin, flexible, magnetic disk enclosed in aprotective jacket.

Document Composition Facility (DCF). A licensedprogram that provides text formatting for the InfoPrint4100.


dots per inch (dpi). A measure of the resolution of ascreen image or printed page.

down fold. Fanfold forms are alternately folded. Whenfanfold forms are unfolded and held horizontally, a foldis a down fold if it points down from the horizontalsurface.

drag. The resistance to forms feeding freely into theprinter; for example, the form rubbing against thecarton.

duplex printing. A mode of printing on both sides of aform. Contrast with simplex printing.

Eelectronic overlay. A collection of constant dataelectronically composed in the controlling computer. Canbe merged with variable data on a page during printing.An electronic overlay defines its own environment. Itcan be in coded form or raster pattern form. See alsopreprinted form.

electrophotographic process. The creation of animage on forms by uniformly charging thephotoconductor, creating an electrostatic image on thephotoconductor, attracting negatively charged toner tothe discharged areas of the photoconductor, andtransferring and fusing the toner to forms.

emboss. To press and raise the surface of paper intoa design. Embossed paper appears thicker thannonembossed paper, can increase printer wear, and candegrade print quality.

end-of-forms sensor. A sensor that detects when thelast sheet of a form enters the printer.

error log. (1) A data set or file in a product or systemwhere error information is stored for later access. (2) Arecord of machine checks, device errors, and volumestatistical data.

ESCON channel. A channel having an EnterpriseSystems Connection channel-to-control unit I/O interfacethat uses optical cable as a transmission medium.

Ethernet. A local area network that allows protocols totransmit on the network without prior coordination.

Ffanfold. Continuous forms that are alternately folded atregular intervals, usually on a perforation.

Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI). An ANSIstandard for a 100 Mbps LAN using optical fiber cables.

fold memory. The ability of a form to refold at the foldperforation after exposure to heat during the fusingprocess.

fold perforation. The perforation on which a form isfolded during manufacture and refolded after printing.See also page perforation.

Font Library Service Facility (FLSF). A licensedprogram that provides a way to make changes to a fontwhile retaining its correct format, as defined by thearchitecture and as required by Print Services Facility.

format. (1) The arrangement or layout of data on adata medium. (2) The size, style, type of page, margins,printing requirements, and so on, of a printed page.

forms. The material on which output data is printed,such as paper. The area between perforations oncontinuous printer forms. See electronic overlay andpreprinted form.

forms path. The entire route that forms travel duringprocessing. The forms path usually begins where theforms are loaded and ends at the forms exit area.Synonym for paper path.

form definition (FORMDEF). A statement thatspecifies the attributes of a physical page, such as thenumber of copies and one-sided or two-sided printing.

fuse. To use heat and pressure to blend toner ontoforms to make a permanent bond.

Ggraphic. A symbol produced by a process such ashandwriting, drawing, or printing. See also vectorgraphics.

Graphical Data Display Manager (GDDM®). Alicensed program that allows pictures to be defined anddisplayed through function routines.

IIBM World Trade Corporation. A subsidiary of IBMthat manufactures and markets IBM products outside ofthe United States of America.

impact printer. A printer in which printing is the resultof mechanical impacts. Contrast with nonimpact printer.

InfoPrint Controller. The latest production printercontroller based on proven AFCCU technology andenhanced for future flexibiliby.

installation. (1) In system development, preparing andplacing a functional unit in position for use. (2) Aparticular computing system, including the work it doesand the people who manage it, operate it, apply it toproblems, service it, and use the results it produces.

Installation planning representative. A Ricohrepresentative who assists customers in planning andmeeting the requirements for installing hardware.

Glossary 245

installation verification procedure. A proceduredistributed with InfoPrint licensed programs that teststhe newly installed InfoPrint programs to verify that thebasic facilities of the programs are functioning correctly.

Intelligent Printer Data Stream (IPDS). Informationthe system sends to printers that containsdecision-making capability. Generally, this informationcontains basic formatting, error recovery, and characterdata.

IPM. Impressions Per Minute

ISO sizes. Pertaining to a set of paper sizes selectedfrom those standardized by the InternationalOrganization for Standardization (ISO) for use in dataprocessing.

Jjam. In a printer, a condition where forms havebecome blocked or wedged in the forms path so theprinter cannot operate.

JES2. An MVS™ subsystem that receives jobs into thesystem, converts them to internal format, selects themfor running, processes their output, and purges themfrom the system. In an installation with more than oneprocessor, each JES2 processor independently controlsits job input, scheduling, and output processing. Seealso JES3.

JES3. An MVS subsystem that receives jobs into thesystem, converts them to internal format, selects themfor running, processes their output, and purges themfrom the system. In complexes that have several looselycoupled processing units, the JES3 program managesprocessors so that the global processor exercisescentralized control over the local processors anddistributes jobs to them via a common job queue. Seealso JES2.

LLAN Adapter and Protocol Support. A subsystemthat includes the software that manages and controlsthe network adapter cards, including the device driversfor those cards as well as the protocols that are used tocommunicate with other adapters on the network.

landscape orientation. Text and images that areprinted parallel to the longer side of the forms. Contrastwith portrait orientation.

laser (light amplification by stimulated emission ofradiation). A device that emits a beam of coherentlight.

latent image. In a printer, the invisible image thatexists in the sensitized material after exposure butbefore development.

layout plan. A list of requirements, such as electricaland space, that must be considered before installing theInfoPrint 4100.

library. A collection of related files. For example, oneline of an invoice may form an item, a complete invoicemay form a file, and the collection of inventory controlfiles may form a library. The libraries used by anorganization are known as the data bank.

licensed program. A separately priced program that isoffered to customers under the terms and conditions ofthe Agreement for Ricoh Licensed Programs.

line printer. A printer that prints a line of characters asa unit. Contrast with page printer.

logical page. The area allocated for print on the page,such as composed text, graphics, and fonts withindefined margins. Contrast with physical page.

logo. An identifying emblem, statement, or motto of acompany.

Mmarketing representative. A Ricoh representativewho takes your order.

MICR printing. The ability of a printer either to printwith magnetic toner or to allow magnetic character inkrecognition through a postprocessing device.

microcode. In the InfoPrint 4100, refers to themicroprogramming stored on the microcode (or EC)diskette. Microcode is used by the control unit tomanage the printer and its functions.

microperforation. Extremely small perforations. Afterforms are separated, those with microperforationstypically have smoother edges than those with regularperforations.

Multiple Virtual Storage/System Product (MVS/SP).Consisting of MVS/System Product Version 1 and theMVS/370 Data Facility Product operating on aSystem/370 processor.

NNetwork adapter. A mechanism for connecting twounlike parts or machines, or for electrically or physicallyconnecting a device to a computer or to another device.

Network protocol. See LAN Adapter and ProtocolSupport.

nonimpact printer. A printer in which printing is notthe result of mechanical impacts. Contrast with impactprinter.


nonprocess runout (NPRO). An operation that movesforms through the forms path without printing.

Ooffset paper. A grade of paper to which sizing isadded to resist moisture and surface during printing byink presses.

operating environment. The physical environment; forexample, temperature, humidity, layout, or powerrequirements.

operating requirements. A list of requirements, suchas environmental, electrical, and space, that must besatisfied before the InfoPrint 4100 can be installed.

Operating System/Virtual Storage (OS/VS).A compatible extension of the IBM System/360Operating System that supports hardware and theextended control facilities of System/370

optical character recognition (OCR). Characterrecognition that uses optical means to identify graphiccharacters.

orientation. The number of degrees an object isrotated relative to a reference; for example, theorientation of an overlay relative to the page point oforigin. See also text orientation.

overlay. See electronic overlay.

Overlay Generation Language/370 (OGL/370). Thelicensed program that is used to create electronicoverlays.

Ppage. A printed form. See also logical page andphysical page.

page definition (PAGEDEF). A statement thatspecifies attributes of a logical page, such as the widthof its margins and the orientation of text.

page perforation. The perforation that defines thepage of a form. It may or may not be at a fold in theform. A form may have several pages between eachfold. See also fold perforation.

page printer. A device that prints one page as a unit.Contrast with line printer.

Page Printer Formatting Aid (PPFA). A licensedprogram that creates form definitions (FORMDEFs) andpage definitions (PAGEDEFs).

page segment. An AFP resource object containingtext, image, graphics, or bar code data that can bepositioned on any addressable point on a page or anelectronic overlay.

pallet. A portable platform for handling, storing, ormoving materials.

paper break. A separation, either at a perforation orfrom a tear, of the continuous-forms paper.

paper path. The entire route that forms travel whilethey are being processed. The paper path usuallybegins where the forms are loaded and ends at theforms exit area. Because not all forms are paper, theterm forms path is preferred.

parallel channel. A channel having a System/360 orSystem/370 channel-to-control unit interface that usesbus-and-tag cables as a transmission medium. Contrastwith ESCON channel.

parameter. A variable that is given a constant valuefor a specified application and that may denote theapplication.

PC drum. A hollow cylinder that is covered withphotoconductive material.

pel (picture element). (1) An element of a rasterpattern; a point where a toned area on thephotoconductor may appear. (2) On anall-points-addressable output medium, each pel is anaddressable unit. On a row-column addressable outputmedium, the only pel addressable is the beginning of acharacter cell.

perforation. A linear series of unconnected cuts in thecontinuous-forms paper. The interval between cuts isreferred to as a tie. The perforation defines either a foldor page boundary. See also cut, fold perforation,microperforation, and page perforation.

photoconductor. The material that is wrapped aboutthe drum. The medium for transferring images to paper.

physical page. The form on which the printer isprinting, such as an 8¹/₂ x 11-inch sheet of paper.Contrast with logical page.

physical planner. The person in an organization whoplans the environmental, electrical, and spacerequirements for your facility.

planning coordinator. The person in yourorganization who is responsible for coordinating all theplanning and installation activities for the InfoPrint 4100.

plant. A manufacturing location.

point of origin. The location of the first print positionon a logical page. The point of origin is usually stated interms of X and Y coordinates. The point of origin usedby a printer can be affected by factors such as printablearea and forms orientation.

portrait orientation. Pertaining to a display or hardcopy with greater height than width. Contrast withlandscape orientation.

Glossary 247

preprinted form. A sheet of forms containing apreprinted design of constant data with which variabledata can be combined. See also electronic overlay.

Print Management Facility (PMF). An interactivemenu-driven program that can be used to create andmodify fonts and to define output formatting for dataprinted on the InfoPrint 4100.

print mode. The operational mode in whichinformation is received from the attached controllingcomputer system and printed output is produced.Contrast with test mode and diagnostic mode.

print position. The physical positions of thecharacters constituting a print line relative to the form.

print quality. The quality of printed output relative toexisting standards and in comparison with jobs printedearlier.

Print Quality Enhancement (PQE). A printer facilitythat provides edge smoothing along diagonal lines, finefidelity protection, and independent boldness control.

Print Services Access Facility (PSAF). Amenu-driven, print-parameter selection program forpage printers controlled by PSF.

print surface. The side of a form that receives theprinted image.

printer utility module (PUM). A section of Printer 1 ina duplex configuration. It includes:

v Operator alert assembly

v Power control panel

v System interconnection electronics

v Pre-processing/post-processing device interfaces

Protocol. See LAN Adapter and Protocol Support.

Rraster. (1) In computer graphics, a predeterminedpattern of lines that provides uniform coverage of adisplay space. (2) The coordinate grid that divides thedisplay area of a display device. (3) In the InfoPrint4100 Printer Subsystem, an on/off pattern ofelectrostatic images produced by the laser print headunder control of the character generator.

raster pattern. A series of picture elements (pels)arranged in scan lines to form an image.

registration. In printing, refers to the relative printpositions of images that are printed at different times.For example, when you process preprinted forms, theregistration is good if the new image printed by theInfoPrint 4100 aligns correctly with the preprinted image.Print that extends beyond box edges and text thatoverlaps other text are examples of poor registration.

resource. (1) People, equipment, or material used toperform a task or a project. (2) Any facility of acomputing system or operating system required by a jobor task, including main storage, input/output devices,processing units, data sets, and controller processingprograms; for example, page printers use resourcessuch as form definitions, page definitions, and fonts.

reverse heading. A heading where each character ishighlighted by reversing the color of the character withits background; for example, changing a black characteron a white background to a white character on a blackbackground.

Sscanner. A device that examines OCR, graphics,MICR, or bar-code patterns and generates electricalsignals corresponding to the pattern. It sends thesignals to a computing device for processing.

screen or screening. In document printing, a sheet ofmaterial, usually film, carrying a regular pattern of smalldots. When printing, ink adheres only to the dots, andmany dots close together appear solid. This methodprints large areas of ink on paper but uses much lessink than printing the same area with solid ink.

security paper. Specially formulated paper used fornegotiable documents, such as checks, which improvesthe anti-fraud characteristics of the document.

service representative. This title has been changed.See theCustomer Support Specialist entry.

shift. A scheduled work period. For example, a24-hour day is often divided into three 8-hour shifts.

simplex printing. Pertaining to printing on only oneside of a form. Contrast with duplex printing.

sizing. A process where paper is treated to give itresistance against penetration of liquids.

special-purpose materials. Printable items other thanblank forms; for example, preprinted forms.

stack lean. A measurable slope from the vertical of astack of forms. Excessive stack lean can cause failureswhen feeding and refolding forms.

Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC). Formanaging synchronous, code-transparent, serial-by-bit,information transfer over a link connection.

system reference code. A code that containsinformation, such as a failing field-replaceable unit, for aCustomer Support Specialist.

system programmer. A programmer who plans,generates, maintains, extends, and controls the use of


an operating system, with the aim of improving overallproductivity of an installation. Contrast with applicationprogrammer.

System/370. An upward-compatible extension of theIBM System/360. A large collection of computing systemdevices that can be combined to produce a wide rangeof computing systems that share many characteristics,including a common machine language.

Ttask. A basic unit of work to be accomplished by adevice or an operator.

TCP/IP. Transmission Control Protocol/InternetProtocol. A set of communication protocols that supportpeer-to-peer connectivity functions for both local andwide area networks.

tensile strength. A measure of the force that thepaper forms can withstand without tearing.

test mode. The operational mode in which the printercan produce print samples, accept configurationchanges, and control traces. When the InfoPrint 4100are in test mode, they is not accepting information fromthe attached controlling computer system. Contrast withprint mode and diagnostic mode.

text orientation. The position of text as a combinationof print direction and baseline direction.

tie. The interval between cuts of a perforation. Seealso perforation.

Token. In a local area network, a particular messageor bit pattern passed successively from one attachingdevice to another to indicate which protocol haspermission to transmit.

Token ring. A network with a ring topology that passestokens from one attaching device to another.

toner. The material that forms the image on the paper.

trace. (1) A record of the running of a computerprogram. It exhibits the sequences in which theinstructions were executed. (2) To record a series ofevents as they occur. (3) In the InfoPrint 4100, aCustomer Support Specialist and customer analysisprocedure.

tractor. The mechanism that controls movement ofcontinuous forms by way of holes (see tractor holes).

tractor holes. The holes in the side margins oncontinuous forms. When placed on the tractor pins, theholes maintain printer alignment and registration, andcontrol the movement of the paper.

Two-Channel Switch. A hardware facility that allowsan input or output device to be attached to two

channels. In a 3900 Advanced Function PrintingSystem, this facility is automatically supplied when twoSystem/370 Parallel channels are installed.

Uup fold. Fanfold forms are alternately folded. Whenfanfold forms are unfolded and held horizontally, a foldis an up fold if it points up from the horizontal surface.

Vvariable data. The data that can vary; for example,the names and addresses in form letters.

vector graphics. Computer graphics in which displayimages are generated from display commands andcoordinate data. Contrast with raster pattern.

Virtual Storage Extended (VSE). An operatingsystem that is an extension of Disk OperatingSystem/Virtual Storage.

Virtual Storage Extended/Advanced Functions(VSE/AF). The minimum operating system support fora VSE-controlled installation.

void. (1) A missing part of the printed character. (2) Amissing piece of a continuous form.

Glossary 249


Index

Numerics2-up printing 24240 dpi IPDS resolution mode 43300 dpi IPDS resolution mode 433130 bar code compatibility, configuration 124480 dpi font smoothing mode 44480/600 switchable resolution 42600 dpi font smoothing mode 44600 dpi IPDS resolution acceptance 43600 dpi IPDS resolution mode 43

Aaccess levels, changing 110access, defining remote 144acoustics 84, 85, 86, 87, 88adapter cards, configuration 126, 127adapter performance considerations 71adapters

configuring 142adding

forms definitions 151pre/postprocessing device interfaces 149

Additional Customer Changeable Developers 33administrator

password protection 110Advanced Function Image and Graphics 24Advanced Function Presentation (AFP) software

bar code 73BCOCA support 73functions 73installing and verifying 76licensed program numbers 73optical character recognition 73Page Printer Formatting Aid 76purpose 20resource resolution 44

Air Bearing Flipper Unit for Duplex printing systems 9all-points addressability 20allow to configure printer, configuration 136application materials

preprinted forms 105application programmer

layout preparation 77responsibilities 58schedule 59

applicationsbar code 73bar codes 45combining text and images 20converting to Advanced Function Printers 76environment 48OCR (Optical Character Recognition) 73preprinted forms 26testing forms 106

ASHRAE 77

attachmentschannel 61channel, performance consideration 71defining 142, 143ESCON channel 49, 64FICON channel 49, 63Gigabit Ethernet 49Gigabit Ethernet TCP/IP channel 62local area networks 61physical 103

auto load 45auto NPRO at end of forms, configuration 118automatic IPDS resolution mode 44auxiliary power source recommendations 82

Bbackup idler roll installed, configuration 120bar code 73Bar Code Object Content Architecture (BCOCA) 73

BCOCA support 73, 76bar codes 45

BCOCA support 73, 76basis weight 35beam adjustments 115beam number, configuration 116beam offset adjustment, configuration 115belt, oiler 167BIR dwell time, configuration 120boldness, configuration 113BTS enabled, configuration 139buffer/flipper units, dimensions and weight 102

Ccable connectors 70cable converters 67cable lengths

print engine power cable 78cable summary 78cables

connector 79locations 89power 78receptacle 79

CE toolkit 60changing

adapter definitions 142forms definitions 151pre/postprocessing device definitions 149printer configuration 112protocols definitions 143touch panel language 109, 118

changing access levels 110changing passwords 110changing values in Snapshots 159

251

channeladapters 61adapters, performance considerations 71cable locations 89ESCON adapter 49, 64FICON adapter 63Gigabit Ethernet TCP/IP adapters 62Multiple Host Environment 65SNMP remote access 71transfer modes 61

characteristics of AFP printers4100 models 2detail 35, 54printer 1, 2summary 1system 1, 2

checklists and work sheetsattachments 177forms 230implementation plan 59installation planning 174physical planning 176printer 177supplies 166system configuration 177

circuit breaker 83clearances, service 89collector, toner 167combining text with images 20common electrical requirements 83communication problems 147concepts, page-printing 20configuration items, description

3130 bar code compatibility 124adapter cards 126, 127allow to configure printer 136auto NPRO at end of forms 118backup idler roll installed 120beam adjustments 115beam number 116beam offset adjustment 115BIR dwell time 120boldness 113BTS enabled 139contrast 113current vector 116cut sheet emulation 123data timeout 135date 119date/time 119default gateway address 130, 132, 134device address 126, 127DHCP addressing 129, 131, 132, 134DHCP plug-and-play 129, 131, 133, 134DHCP time out 129, 131, 133, 134domain name of local host 130, 132, 134double-byte font smoothing 124E-mail 136e-mail enabled 136eject to front facing 118ESCON 127

configuration items, description (continued)Ethernet copper integrated #1 129Ethernet copper integrated #2 134Ethernet copper NIC 130Ethernet fiber NIC 132FICON 126fix orientation 124font usage 122front sheet sequence 117FTP 135horizontal high 116horizontal low 116input buffer size 122internal stacker, Models HS2 and HD3/4 139internet name of local host 130, 131, 133, 134IP address 129, 131, 133, 134IP address of primary and secondary DNS

server 134IP address of primary DNS server 130, 132, 133IPDS 123IPDS printhead resolution 123IPDS resolution 124IPDS TCP/IP 135IPPD 137jam recovery type 124keyboard language 118logical page increment 124machine serial 120maximum block length 126, 128media speed 130, 132, 133, 134media speed FICON link A 127media speed FICON link B 127multi-host environment flag 126, 128new device name 139offset on mark forms 139offsetter enabled 139oil belt 113oil rate 113Online Access (Web Pages) 136, 138Online Access (Web Pages) enabled 136Online Access (Web Pages) log 136output buffer size 122overlay usage 122page segment usage 122postprocessing options 139PQE adjustments 116pre/postprocessing 139preheat offset 114preheat temperature 113Primary 129, 130, 132, 134print count 120print jobs 138print quality 113print quality advanced 114printer basic 117printer configuration 112printer counter 120printer mode 117printer problems e-mail address 136Printer Reported Service and Configuration

Data 137


configuration items, description (continued)printer service e-mail address 136printer speed 117printer supplies e-mail address 136priority 127, 128process factory adjustment 120Productivity Tracking Feature 138protocols 143PRSCD 137PRSCD e-mail address 137remote access 144resource utilization 122restricted access 138same side printing 117scale GOCA lines 125scan factory adjust 120service 120side 1 verify factory adjust 121side 2 verify 117side 2 verify factory adjust 121simulate color with gray 124single-byte font smoothing 124SNMP 136, 138SNMP agent enabled 136SNMP community name 136SNMP trap host 136subnet mask 130, 131, 133, 134suppress off page errors 124tcp port 135Telnet 3270 137Telnet 5250 137time 119time server name 119time server type 119time source 119time zone 119toner type 120trace e-mail enabled 136UP3I device name 140UP3I devices 139use backup idler roll 114vector boldness 116vertical high 116vertical low 116

configuringadapters 142e-mail trace 144protocols 143PRSCD 145remote access 144, 145, 146

configuring the systemadapters 142changing the language of messages 109, 118defining adapters 142defining forms 151defining pre/postprocessing devices 149defining protocols 143defining the printer 112forms definitions 151pre/post processing devices 149printer 112

configuring the system (continued)protocols 143touch panel language 109, 118work sheets 177

connectivity problems 147connectors, electrical 79, 80continuous forms 105contrast, configuration 113control

power 46converter cable selection chart 68converting applications to the Advanced Function

Printers 59, 76coordinator, planning 57current vector, configuration 116Customer Changeable Developer 32customer engineer password protection 110Customer Support Specialist password protection 110Cut Sheet Emulation 25cut sheet emulation, configuration 123

Ddata security 53data timeout, configuration 135date, configuration 119date/time 119default gateway address, configuration 130, 132, 134default trace e-mail enabled, configuration 136defining forms 151defining operator identities 110defining remote access 144deleting

forms definitions 151pre/postprocessing device interface 149

Developer Cart 33developer mix 167device address, configuration 126, 127DHCP addressing, configuration 129, 131, 132, 134DHCP plug-and-play, configuration 129, 131, 133, 134DHCP time out, configuration 129, 131, 133, 134dimensions, buffer/flipper units 102dimensions, printer and control unit 102dimensions, uncrated 102disconnect power 83Document Composition Facility (DCF) 76domain name of local host, configuration 130, 132,

134double-byte font smoothing, configuration 124duplex models

changing the language of messages 109, 118configuration 173

adapters 142configuration work sheets 177defining forms 151language of messages 109, 118pre/postprocessing devices 149protocols 143

configuration work sheets 177defining adapters 142defining forms 151

Index 253

duplex models (continued)defining pre/postprocessing devices 149defining protocols 143defining the printer 112heat, output 83host adapter choices 48physical layout 101power control 46space requirements 88system components 5

duplex systemsconfigurations 89

Ee-mail 144E-mail 136e-mail enabled, configuration 136e-mail trace, configuring 144editing multiple Snapshots 159eject to front facing enabled, configuration 118electric

power requirements 78receptacles 79, 80

electrical requirements 82electronic overlays 26EN 61000-3-11 compliance statement 83Enhanced N-Up (Power Positioning) 48Enhanced N-Up Printing 25enhanced toner loading 26environment, application 48environmental requirements 77error log 53ESCON 127ESCON channel adapter 49, 64Ethernet copper integrated #1 129Ethernet copper integrated #2 134Ethernet copper NIC 130Ethernet fiber NIC 132

Ffactors affecting performance 71Feature Codes 9feature codes for common cables 68feature codes for jumper cables 66features

adapter cable features 66Additional Customer Changeable Developers 33common cables 68Customer Changeable Developer 32Developer Cart 33Magnetic Ink Character Recognition (MICR)

CCD 26FICON 126FICON channel adapter 49, 63filter, fine 167fine filter 167fire safety 78fixed orientation, configuration 124

flat panel touchscreenchanging language 109, 118

flat-panel touch screen 46font smoothing mode 44font usage, configuration 122fonts

MICR 29resident 55TrueType/OpenType 26

fonts, MICR 29form bar code, settings 153form name, settings 152format requirements for MICR 29, 30format verification for MICR 32forms

adding or changing 151basis weight 35defining 151definition viiidefinition (FORMDEF) 26deleting 151form bar code 153form name 152handling 45host setup ID 153length 152marks 154oversize paper 154paper weight 154preprinted 105requirements 105selecting 105settings work sheet 230sizes and types used 36special-purpose materials 105storage recommendations 105testing 105tractorless 153units 152width 152

front sheet sequence, configuration 117FTP 135fuser oil 167

GGigabit Ethernet channel adapters 62grounding

recommendations 82

Hhandling forms 45hardware requirements 48heat

dissipation 83output 83

horizontal high, configuration 116horizontal low, configuration 116host adapter 48host setup ID, settings 153


humidity 77

IIBM supplies

customer-replaceable items 172developer mix 167fine filter 167fuser oil 167maintenance items 172oiler belt 167ordering 172storing 172suggested quantities 165toner 167toner collector 167warranty return 172work sheet 166

identities, defining and managing 110images 20

combining with text 20orienting 21

implementation plan checklist 59InfoPrint 4100 Models 100InfoPrint Manager 48InfoPrint Process Director (IPPD) 144ink, suggestions for selection 105input buffer size, configuration 122installation

planning work sheet 174requirements 104verification procedures 61

installing licensed programs 76intelligent printer data stream (IPDS) 48, 61

resolution acceptance240 dpi mode 43300 dpi mode 43600 dpi mode 43600 dpi only 43automatic mode 44

interface point requirements for low frequencyphenomena 83

interface, preprocessor and postprocessor 50internal stacker, configuration 139internet name of local host, configuration 130, 131,

133, 134IP address of primary and secondary DNS server,

configuration 134IP address of primary DNS server, configuration 130,

132, 133IP address, configuration 129, 131, 133, 134IPDS 123IPDS mode 47IPDS printhead resolution, configuration 123IPDS resolution, configuration 124IPDS TCP/IP 135IPPD 137

Jjam recovery type, configuration 124jumper cables, feature codes 66

Kkeyboard language, configuration 118

LLAN communication problems 147LAN connectivity problems 147landscape orientation 22language, changing for touch panel 109, 118languages, operator console 53layout considerations 102Length, settings 152levels, noise emission 84, 85, 86, 87, 88libraries, resource 25line-printer data conversion 76loading Snapshots from diskette 164loading Snapshots from flash memory device 163Local Area Network (LAN)

adapters 61Gigabit Ethernet TCP/IP channel adapter 62

Local/Remote power control 46, 47logical page 26logical page increment, configuration 124low frequency phenomena 83

Mmachine serial, configuration 120Magnetic ink character recognition (MICR) CCD 27Magnetic Ink Character Recognition (MICR) CCD 26managing users 110margins, page 45marks, settings 154materials, special-purpose

preprinted forms 105storage 105

maximum block length, configuration 126, 128measurements, clearance 88media speed FICON link A, configuration 127media speed FICON link B, configuration 127media speed, configuration 130, 132, 133, 134MICR 27MICR fonts 29MICR format requirements 29MICR quality and format verification 32MICR quality control 31MICR with InfoPrint 4100 27mix, developer 167multi-host environment flag, configuration 126, 128Multiple Host Environment 65

NN-Up Positioning 48new device name, configuration 139

Index 255

noise emission levels 84, 85, 86, 87, 88Normal and Tumble Duplex Printing 23

Oobtaining supplies 165, 233OCR (Optical Character Recognition)

applications 73print area 45

offset on mark forms, configuration 139offsetter enabled, configuration 139oil belt, configuration 113oil pan 167oil rate, configuration 113oil, fuser 167oiler belt 167Online Access (Web Pages) 136, 144Online Access (Web Pages) enabled,

configuration 136Online Access (Web Pages) log, clear 136Online Access (Web Pages) log, show 136Online Access (Web Pages), configuration 138operating requirements

electrical 78environmental 77

operator 58console, languages 53password protection 110

Optical Character Recognition (OCR)applications 73print area 45

optional Advanced Function Image and Graphics 24ordering supplies 172orient text and images 21outlet, vacuum cleaner 78output buffer size, configuration 122output, heat 83overlay usage, configuration 122oversize paper, settings 154

Ppage

definition (PAGEDEF) 26margins 45orientation 21physical and logical 26segments 26

page segment usage, configuration 122page-printing concepts 20PAGEDEFs 26pallets, shipping 101Paper Paths 9paper weight, settings 154passwords, changing 110performance, printer 35, 77physical

attachment requirements 103layout 101page 26physical requirements 78

physical (continued)planner


planning work sheet 176physical installation

power and grounding recommendations 81planner, physical 58planning coordinator 57planning team

application programmer 58layout preparation 77responsibilities 58schedule 59

organizing 57physical planner 58


planning coordinator 57printer operator 58system programmer 58


plug and connector requirements 79, 80portrait orientation 22postprocessing options 139postprocessor interface 50power

Auxiliary power source recommendations 82print engine 83recommendations 81

power cable and receptacle 79power control 46power outlet summary 78Power Positioning (Enhanced N-Up) 25, 48PPFA support for UP3I 52PQE adjustments 116PQE boldness, configuration 113pre-installation tasks 104pre/postprocessing 139pre/postprocessing devices

defining 149precautions to prevent fire 78preheat offset, configuration 114preheat temperature, configuration 113preparing the physical environment 77preprinted forms 105preprocessor interface 50Primary, configuration 129, 130, 132, 134print

area 45material 35quality 36quality enhancement 40samples 53

print count, configuration 120print engine power 83print engine power cable lengths 78


print jobs, configuration 138Print On Demand 47Print On Demand (POD) 47print quality 113print quality advanced 114print quality, saving to a Snapshot 160Print Services Facility (PSF) 48printer

configuration 173dimensions and weight 102operator 58resolution 42

240/300 IPDS mode 43480/600 switchable 42600 dpi IPDS mode 43automatic IPDS mode 44font smoothing mode 44IPDS acceptance (600 dpi only) 43

splicing station 45printer basic 117printer characteristics 1, 2printer configuration 112printer counter, configuration 120printer mode, configuration 117printer problems e-mail address, configuration 136Printer Reported Service and Configuration Data 137Printer Reported Service and Configuration Data

(PRSCD) 144printer servcie e-mail address, configuration 136printer speed, configuration 117printer supplies e-mail address, configuration 136printers

480/600 switchable 42printing

basic N-up 24basic page 20cut sheet emulation 25enhanced N-up 25multiple-up 24

options 25normal duplex 23speed 35tumbling duplex 23

printing MICR documents 27priority, configuration 127, 128procedures, installation verification 61process factory adjustment, configuration 120production print mode 47Productivity Tracking Feature, configuration 138programmers, planning for AFP programs 58protocols 143

configuring 143PRSCD 137PRSCD (Printer Reported Service and Configuration

Data) 144PRSCD e-mail address, configuration 137PRSCD, configuring 145

Qquality verification for MICR 32quality, MICR 31

Rreceptacle, electrical 79, 80relative humidity, permitted values 77reliability, availability, and serviceability (RAS) 53

error log 53message display 53print samples 53traces 53

remote access 144IPPD 137Online Access (Web Pages) 136SNMP 136Telnet 3270 137Telnet 5250 137

remote access, configuring 144, 145, 146remote access, defining 144requirements

Advanced Function Presentation (AFP) LicensedPrograms 72

channel adapter 61electrical 78environmental 77forms 105hardware 48humidity 77installation 104physical attachment 103power 78software 47sound levels 84, 85, 86, 87, 88special-purpose materials 35temperature 77ventilation 77

resident fonts 55resource libraries 25resource resolution, AFP 44resource utilization 122resources

electronic overlays 26form definition (FORMDEF) 26page definition (PAGEDEF) 26page segments 26

restricted access 138Russellstoll plugs 79

Ssafety 78same side printing, configuration 117scale GOCA lines, configuration 125scan factory adjust, configuration 120security, data 53Select Medium Modification (SMM) 48, 50selecting a cable feature 66selecting forms 105

Index 257

service 120access 88cable locations 89clearances 89

service current capacity requirements 82serviceability 53Setting up the printer for printing with MICR toner 28shipping pallets 101short circuit ratio requirements 82side 1 verify factory adjust, configuration 121side 2 verify factory adjust, configuration 121side 2 verify, configuration 117Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) 144simplex models

heat, output 83host adapter choices 48power control 47printer components 3

simulate color with gray, configuration 124single-byte font smoothing, configuration 124SMM (Select Medium Modification) 48, 50Snapshots

creating new Snapshots 159editing 159loading from diskette 164loading from USB flash memory device 163saving print quality settings 160

SNMP 136SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) 144SNMP agent enabled, configuration 136SNMP community name, configuration 136SNMP trap host, configuration 136SNMP, configuration 138software requirements 47

IPDS mode (production print mode) 47Print On Demand 47

sound levels 84, 85, 86, 87, 88Space Requirements

‘H’ Configuration for Models MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6,TD1/2, TD3/4 and TD5/6

with web cooling system 92‘H’ Configuration for Models MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6,

TD1/2, TD3/4, and TD5/6without web cooling system 98

Inline Configuration for Models HD3/4 or TD3/4without web cooling system 94

Inline Configuration for Models HD5/6 or TD5/6without web cooling system 95

Inline Configuration for Models MD1/2 or TD1/2without web cooling system 93

Inline Configuration for Models MD1/2, HD3/4,HD5/6, TD1/2, TD3/4, and TD5/6

with web cooling system 90Left-Angle Configuration for Models MD1/2, HD3/4,

HD5/6, TD1/2, TD3/4, and TD5/6with web cooling system 91, 96

special-purpose materialspreprinted forms 105requirements 35

splicing station 45

storageforms 105supplies 172

stored information, using 25storing resources in libraries 25structures, FORMDEF and PAGEDEF 26subnet mask, configuration 130, 131, 133, 134supplies, InfoPrint

customer-replaceable items 172developer mix 167fine filter 167fuser oil 167maintenance items 172oiler belt 167ordering 172storing 172suggested quantities 165toner 167toner collector 167warranty returns 172work sheet 166

suppress off page errors, configuration 124system characteristics 1, 2system configurations and usage

'H' configuration for Models MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6,TD1/2, TD3/4, and TD5/6

with web cooling system 13without web cooling system 19

dual simplex 5, 6duplex printing 5inline duplex for Models HD3/4 or TD3/4

without web cooling system 16inline duplex for Models HD5/6 or TD5/6

without web cooling system 17inline duplex for Models MD1/2 or TD1/2

without web cooling system 15inline duplex for Models MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6,

TD1/2, TD3/4, and TD5/6without web cooling system 11

left-angle dual simplexwithout web cooling system 14

left-angle duplex for Models MD1/2, HD3/4, HD5/6,TD1/2, TD3/4, and TD5/6

with web cooling system 12without web cooling system 18

printer components 3simplex models 4simplex printing 3, 6system components 5

system libraries 25system programmer


system requirements for UP3I 51

TTall Buffer/Flipper Unit for duplex printing system 9TCP port, configuration 135TCP/IP 135


TCP/IP (continued)Gigabit Ethernet channel adapters 62

teflon mat 167Telnet 3270 137, 144Telnet 5250 137, 144temperature 77testing forms 105, 106text

combining with images 20orienting 21

threading, automatic 45time source, configuration 119time zone, configuration 119time, configuration 119toner 167toner collector 167toner loading, enhanced 26toner type, configuration 120toolkit, CE 60traces 53tractorless, settings 153transfer modes 61transferring Snapshots between printers 163, 164troubleshooting LAN communication problems 147troubleshooting LAN connectivity problems 147TrueType/OpenType Fonts 26

UUnicode print data 26units, settings 152universal printer pre- and postprocessing interface

(UP3I) 50UP3I 50, 52UP3I conduits 52UP3I devices 51UP3I system requirements 51UP3I device name, configuration 140UP3I devices 139ups 82use backup idler roll, configuration 114using stored information 25

Vvacuum cleaner 78, 165vector boldness, configuration 116ventilation 77verification procedures, installation 61verifying licensed programs 76vertical high, configuration 116vertical low, configuration 116voltage requirements 78

Wwear strip 167Web Cooling System 7Web Pages (Online Access) 136weight and dimensions, buffer/flipper units 102weight and dimensions, crated 102

width, settings 152wiring information 78work sheets and checklists

implementation plan 59installation planning 174physical planning 176supplies 166system configuration 177

Index 259


File Number: S370/4300/9370-16

Printed in USA

G550-0990-06

InfoPrint 4100 Models with the InfoPrint Controller ...info.rpp.ricoh-usa.com/help/topic/com.ibm.printers.continuous/G550... · 5/31/2012 · Valid Form Lengths in Inches ... Models

Documents